Merge pull request #18569 from netbox-community/release-v4.2.3

Release 4.2.3

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/01-feature_request.yaml

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 ---
 name: ✨ Feature Request
+type: Feature
 description: Propose a new NetBox feature or enhancement
-labels: ["type: feature"]
+labels: ["type: feature", "status: needs triage"]
 body:
   - type: markdown
     attributes:
@@ -14,7 +15,7 @@ body:
     attributes:
       label: NetBox version
       description: What version of NetBox are you currently running?
-      placeholder: v3.0.7
+      placeholder: v4.2.3
     validations:
       required: true
   - type: dropdown
@@ -24,6 +25,7 @@ body:
         - Data model extension
         - New functionality
         - Change to existing functionality
+        - Other
     validations:
       required: true
   - type: textarea

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/02-bug_report.yaml

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 ---
 name: 🐛 Bug Report
+type: Bug
 description: Report a reproducible bug in the current release of NetBox
-labels: ["type: bug"]
+labels: ["type: bug", "status: needs triage"]
 body:
   - type: markdown
     attributes:
@@ -10,24 +11,33 @@ body:
         installation. If you're having trouble with installation or just looking for
         assistance with using NetBox, please visit our
         [discussion forum](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) instead.
+  - type: dropdown
+    attributes:
+      label: Deployment Type
+      description: >
+        How are you running NetBox? (For issues with the Docker image, please go to the
+        [netbox-docker](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-docker) repo.)
+      options:
+        - NetBox Cloud
+        - NetBox Enterprise
+        - Self-hosted
+    validations:
+      required: true
   - type: input
     attributes:
-      label: NetBox version
-      description: >
-        What version of NetBox are you currently running? (If you don't have access to the most
-        recent NetBox release, consider testing on our [demo instance](https://demo.netbox.dev/)
-        before opening a bug report to see if your issue has already been addressed.)
-      placeholder: v3.0.7
+      label: NetBox Version
+      description: What version of NetBox are you currently running?
+      placeholder: v4.2.3
     validations:
       required: true
   - type: dropdown
     attributes:
-      label: Python version
+      label: Python Version
       description: What version of Python are you currently running?
       options:
-        - "3.7"
-        - "3.8"
-        - "3.9"
+        - "3.10"
+        - "3.11"
+        - "3.12"
     validations:
       required: true
   - type: textarea

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/03-documentation_change.yaml

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 ---
 name: 📖 Documentation Change
+type: Documentation
 description: Suggest an addition or modification to the NetBox documentation
-labels: ["type: documentation"]
+labels: ["type: documentation", "status: needs triage"]
 body:
   - type: dropdown
     attributes:
@@ -19,11 +20,15 @@ body:
       label: Area
       description: To what section of the documentation does this change primarily pertain?
       options:
-        - Installation instructions
-        - Configuration parameters
-        - Functionality/features
-        - REST API
-        - Administration/development
+        - Features
+        - Installation/upgrade
+        - Getting started
+        - Configuration
+        - Customization
+        - Integrations/API
+        - Plugins
+        - Administration
+        - Development
         - Other
     validations:
       required: true

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/04-translation.yaml

@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+---
+name: 🌍 Translation
+type: Translation
+description: Request support for a new language in the user interface
+labels: ["type: translation"]
+body:
+  - type: markdown
+    attributes:
+      value: >
+        **NOTE:** This template is used only for proposing the addition of *new* languages. Please do
+        not use it to request changes to existing translations.
+  - type: input
+    attributes:
+      label: Language
+      description: What is the name of the language in English?
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: input
+    attributes:
+      label: ISO 639-1 code
+      description: >
+        What is the two-letter [ISO 639-1 code](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes)
+        assigned to the language?
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: dropdown
+    attributes:
+      label: Volunteer
+      description: Are you a fluent speaker of this language **and** willing to contribute a translation map?
+      options:
+        - "Yes"
+        - "No"
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: textarea
+    attributes:
+      label: Comments
+      description: Any other notes you would like to share

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/05-housekeeping.yaml

@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 ---
 name: 🏡 Housekeeping
+type: Housekeeping
 description: A change pertaining to the codebase itself (developers only)
 labels: ["type: housekeeping"]
 body:

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/06-deprecation.yaml

@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+---
+name: 🗑️ Deprecation
+type: Deprecation
+description: The removal of an existing feature or resource
+labels: ["type: deprecation"]
+body:
+  - type: textarea
+    attributes:
+      label: Proposed Changes
+      description: >
+        Describe in detail the proposed changes. What is being removed?
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: textarea
+    attributes:
+      label: Justification
+      description: Please provide justification for the proposed change(s).
+    validations:
+      required: true
+  - type: textarea
+    attributes:
+      label: Impact
+      description: List all areas of the application that will be affected by this change.
+    validations:
+      required: true

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/config.yml

@@ -2,11 +2,20 @@
 blank_issues_enabled: false
 contact_links:
   - name: 📖 Contributing Policy
-    url: https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/develop/CONTRIBUTING.md
-    about: "Please read through our contributing policy before opening an issue or pull request"
+    url: https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md
+    about: "Please read through our contributing policy before opening an issue or pull request."
   - name: ❓ Discussion
     url: https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions
-    about: "If you're just looking for help, try starting a discussion instead"
+    about: "If you're just looking for help, try starting a discussion instead."
+  - name: 👔 Professional Support
+    url: https://netboxlabs.com/netbox-enterprise/
+    about: "Professional support is available for NetBox Enterprise or Cloud."
+  - name: 🌎 Correct a Translation
+    url: https://explore.transifex.com/netbox-community/netbox/
+    about: "Spot an incorrect translation? You can propose a fix on Transifex."
+  - name: 💡 Plugin Idea
+    url: https://plugin-ideas.netbox.dev
+    about: "Have an idea for a plugin? Head over to the ideas board!"
   - name: 💬 Community Slack
-    url: https://netdev.chat/
-    about: "Join #netbox on the NetDev Community Slack for assistance with installation issues and other problems"
+    url: https://netdev.chat
+    about: "Join #netbox on the NetDev Community Slack for assistance with installation issues and other problems."

.github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md

@@ -1,15 +1,17 @@
 <!--
-    Thank you for your interest in contributing to NetBox! Please note
-    that our contribution policy requires that a feature request or bug
-    report be opened for approval prior to filing a pull request. This
-    helps avoid wasting time and effort on something that we might not
-    be able to accept.
+    Thank you for your interest in contributing to NetBox! Please note that
+    our contribution policy requires that a feature request or bug report be
+    approved and assigned prior to opening a pull request. This helps avoid
+    waste time and effort on a proposed change that we might not be able to
+    accept.
 
-    Please indicate the relevant feature request or bug report below.
-    IF YOUR PULL REQUEST DOES NOT REFERENCE AN ACCEPTED BUG REPORT OR
-    FEATURE REQUEST, IT WILL BE MARKED AS INVALID AND CLOSED.
+    IF YOUR PULL REQUEST DOES NOT REFERENCE AN ISSUE WHICH HAS BEEN ASSIGNED
+    TO YOU, IT WILL BE CLOSED AUTOMATICALLY.
+
+    Please specify your assigned issue number on the line below.
 -->
-### Fixes: <ISSUE NUMBER GOES HERE>
+### Fixes: #1234
+
 <!--
     Please include a summary of the proposed changes below.
 -->

.github/workflows/ci.yml

@@ -1,12 +1,38 @@
 name: CI
-on: [push, pull_request]
+
+on:
+  push:
+    paths-ignore:
+      - '.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/**'
+      - '.github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md'
+      - 'contrib/**'
+      - 'docs/**'
+      - 'netbox/translations/**'
+  pull_request:
+    paths-ignore:
+      - '.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/**'
+      - '.github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md'
+      - 'contrib/**'
+      - 'docs/**'
+      - 'netbox/translations/**'
+
+permissions:
+  contents: read
+
+# Add concurrency group to control job running
+concurrency:
+  group: ${{ github.event_name }}-${{ github.ref }}-${{ github.actor }}
+  cancel-in-progress: true
+
 jobs:
   build:
     runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    env:
+      NETBOX_CONFIGURATION: netbox.configuration_testing
     strategy:
       matrix:
-        python-version: [3.7, 3.8, 3.9]
-        node-version: [14.x]
+        python-version: ['3.10', '3.11', '3.12']
+        node-version: ['20.x']
     services:
       redis:
         image: redis
@@ -27,25 +53,36 @@ jobs:
 
     steps:
     - name: Check out repo
-      uses: actions/checkout@v2
+      uses: actions/checkout@v4
 
     - name: Set up Python ${{ matrix.python-version }}
-      uses: actions/setup-python@v2
+      uses: actions/setup-python@v5
       with:
         python-version: ${{ matrix.python-version }}
 
     - name: Use Node.js ${{ matrix.node-version }}
-      uses: actions/setup-node@v2
+      uses: actions/setup-node@v4
       with:
         node-version: ${{ matrix.node-version }}
+    
+    - name: Install Yarn Package Manager
+      run: npm install -g yarn
+    
+    - name: Setup Node.js with Yarn Caching
+      uses: actions/setup-node@v4
+      with:
+        node-version: ${{ matrix.node-version }}
+        cache: yarn
+        cache-dependency-path: netbox/project-static/yarn.lock
+    
+    - name: Install Frontend Dependencies
+      run: yarn --cwd netbox/project-static
 
     - name: Install dependencies & set up configuration
       run: |
         python -m pip install --upgrade pip
         pip install -r requirements.txt
-        pip install pycodestyle coverage
-        ln -s configuration.testing.py netbox/netbox/configuration.py
-        yarn --cwd netbox/project-static
+        pip install ruff coverage tblib
 
     - name: Build documentation
       run: mkdocs build
@@ -53,8 +90,11 @@ jobs:
     - name: Collect static files
       run: python netbox/manage.py collectstatic --no-input
 
+    - name: Check for missing migrations
+      run: python netbox/manage.py makemigrations --check
+
     - name: Check PEP8 compliance
-      run: pycodestyle --ignore=W504,E501 --exclude=node_modules netbox/
+      run: ruff check netbox/
 
     - name: Check UI ESLint, TypeScript, and Prettier Compliance
       run: yarn --cwd netbox/project-static validate
@@ -63,7 +103,7 @@ jobs:
       run: scripts/verify-bundles.sh
 
     - name: Run tests
-      run: coverage run --source="netbox/" netbox/manage.py test netbox/
+      run: coverage run --source="netbox/" netbox/manage.py test netbox/ --parallel
 
     - name: Show coverage report
-      run: coverage report --skip-covered --omit *migrations*
+      run: coverage report --skip-covered --omit '*/migrations/*,*/tests/*'

.github/workflows/close-incomplete-issues.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+# close-stale-issues (https://github.com/marketplace/actions/close-stale-issues)
+name: Close incomplete issues
+
+on:
+  schedule:
+    - cron: '15 4 * * *'
+  workflow_dispatch:
+
+permissions:
+  actions: write
+  issues: write
+
+jobs:
+  stale:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - uses: actions/stale@v9
+        with:
+          close-issue-message: >
+            This issue is being closed as no further information has been provided. If
+            you would like to revisit this topic, please first modify your original post
+            to include all the requested detail, and then ask that the issue be reopened.
+          days-before-stale: 7
+          days-before-close: 7
+          only-issue-labels: 'status: revisions needed'
+          operations-per-run: 100
+          remove-stale-when-updated: false
+          stale-issue-label: 'pending closure'
+          stale-issue-message: >
+            This is a reminder that additional information is needed in order to further
+            triage this issue. If the requested details are not provided, the issue will
+            soon be closed automatically.

.github/workflows/close-stale-issues.yml

@@ -1,33 +1,51 @@
 # close-stale-issues (https://github.com/marketplace/actions/close-stale-issues)
-name: 'Close stale issues/PRs'
+name: Close stale issues/PRs
+
 on:
   schedule:
     - cron: '0 4 * * *'
+  workflow_dispatch:
+
+permissions:
+  actions: write
+  issues: write
+  pull-requests: write
 
 jobs:
   stale:
     runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     steps:
-      - uses: actions/stale@v4
+      - uses: actions/stale@v9
         with:
+          # General parameters
+          operations-per-run: 200
+          remove-stale-when-updated: false
+
+          # Issue parameters
           close-issue-message: >
             This issue has been automatically closed due to lack of activity. In an
             effort to reduce noise, please do not comment any further. Note that the
             core maintainers may elect to reopen this issue at a later date if deemed
             necessary.
-          close-pr-message: >
-            This PR has been automatically closed due to lack of activity.
-          days-before-stale: 60
-          days-before-close: 30
-          exempt-issue-labels: 'status: accepted,status: blocked,status: needs milestone'
-          operations-per-run: 100
-          remove-stale-when-updated: false
+          days-before-issue-stale: 90
+          days-before-issue-close: 30
+          exempt-issue-labels: 'status: accepted,status: backlog,status: blocked'
           stale-issue-label: 'pending closure'
           stale-issue-message: >
             This issue has been automatically marked as stale because it has not had
             recent activity. It will be closed if no further activity occurs. NetBox
             is governed by a small group of core maintainers which means not all opened
-            issues may receive direct feedback. Please see our [contributing guide](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/develop/CONTRIBUTING.md).
+            issues may receive direct feedback. **Do not** attempt to circumvent this
+            process by "bumping" the issue; doing so will result in its immediate closure
+            and you may be barred from participating in any future discussions. Please see
+            our [contributing guide](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md).
+
+          # Pull request parameters
+          close-pr-message: >
+            This PR has been automatically closed due to lack of activity.
+          days-before-pr-stale: 30
+          days-before-pr-close: 15
+          exempt-pr-labels: 'status: blocked'
           stale-pr-label: 'pending closure'
           stale-pr-message: >
             This PR has been automatically marked as stale because it has not had

.github/workflows/lock-threads.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+# lock-threads (https://github.com/marketplace/actions/lock-threads)
+name: Lock threads
+
+on:
+  schedule:
+    - cron: '0 3 * * *'
+  workflow_dispatch:
+
+permissions:
+  issues: write
+  pull-requests: write
+  discussions: write
+
+jobs:
+  lock:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - uses: dessant/lock-threads@v5
+        with:
+          issue-inactive-days: 90
+          pr-inactive-days: 30
+          discussion-inactive-days: 180
+          issue-lock-reason: 'resolved'

.github/workflows/lock.yml

@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-# lock-threads (https://github.com/marketplace/actions/lock-threads)
-name: 'Lock threads'
-
-on:
-  schedule:
-    - cron: '0 3 * * *'
-
-jobs:
-  lock:
-    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
-    steps:
-      - uses: dessant/lock-threads@v2
-        with:
-          github-token: ${{ github.token }}
-          issue-lock-inactive-days: '90'
-          issue-exclude-created-before: ''
-          issue-exclude-labels: ''
-          issue-lock-labels: ''
-          issue-lock-comment: ''
-          issue-lock-reason: 'resolved'
-          process-only: 'issues'

.github/workflows/update-translation-strings.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+name: Update translation strings
+
+on:
+  schedule:
+    - cron: '0 5 * * *'
+  workflow_dispatch:
+
+permissions:
+  contents: write
+
+env:
+  LOCALE: "en"
+
+jobs:
+  makemessages:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    env:
+      NETBOX_CONFIGURATION: netbox.configuration_testing
+
+    steps:
+    - name: Create app token
+      uses: actions/create-github-app-token@v1
+      id: app-token
+      with:
+        app-id: 1076524
+        private-key: ${{ secrets.HOUSEKEEPING_SECRET_KEY }}
+
+    - name: Check out repo
+      uses: actions/checkout@v4
+      with:
+          token: ${{ steps.app-token.outputs.token }}
+
+    - name: Set up Python
+      uses: actions/setup-python@v5
+      with:
+        python-version: 3.11
+
+    - name: Install system dependencies
+      run: sudo apt install -y gettext
+
+    - name: Install Python dependencies
+      run: |
+        python -m pip install --upgrade pip
+        pip install -r requirements.txt
+
+    - name: Run makemessages
+      run: python netbox/manage.py makemessages -l ${{ env.LOCALE }}
+
+    - name: Commit changes
+      uses: EndBug/add-and-commit@v9
+      with:
+        add: 'netbox/translations/'
+        default_author: github_actions
+        message: 'Update source translation strings'

.gitignore

@@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ yarn-error.log*
 !/netbox/project-static/docs/.info
 /netbox/netbox/configuration.py
 /netbox/netbox/ldap_config.py
+/netbox/local/*
 /netbox/reports/*
 !/netbox/reports/__init__.py
 /netbox/scripts/*
@@ -16,12 +17,15 @@ yarn-error.log*
 /venv/
 /*.sh
 local_requirements.txt
+local_settings.py
 !upgrade.sh
 fabfile.py
 gunicorn.py
+uwsgi.ini
 netbox.log
 netbox.pid
 .DS_Store
 .idea
 .coverage
 .vscode
+.python-version

.pre-commit-config.yaml

@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+repos:
+- repo: https://github.com/astral-sh/ruff-pre-commit
+  rev: v0.6.9
+  hooks:
+    - id: ruff
+      name: "Ruff linter"
+      args: [ netbox/ ]
+- repo: local
+  hooks:
+    - id: django-check
+      name: "Django system check"
+      description: "Run Django's internal check for common problems"
+      entry: python netbox/manage.py check
+      language: system
+      pass_filenames: false
+      types: [python]
+    - id: django-makemigrations
+      name: "Django migrations check"
+      description: "Check for any missing Django migrations"
+      entry: python netbox/manage.py makemigrations --check
+      language: system
+      pass_filenames: false
+      types: [python]
+    - id: mkdocs-build
+      name: "Build documentation"
+      description: "Build the documentation with mkdocs"
+      files: 'docs/'
+      entry: mkdocs build
+      language: system
+      pass_filenames: false
+    - id: yarn-validate
+      name: "Yarn validate"
+      description: "Check UI ESLint, TypeScript, and Prettier compliance"
+      files: 'netbox/project-static/'
+      entry: yarn --cwd netbox/project-static validate
+      language: system
+      pass_filenames: false
+    - id: verify-bundles
+      name: "Verify static asset bundles"
+      description: "Ensure that any modified static assets have been compiled"
+      files: 'netbox/project-static/'
+      entry: scripts/verify-bundles.sh
+      language: system
+      pass_filenames: false

.readthedocs.yaml

@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+version: 2
+build:
+  os: ubuntu-22.04
+  tools:
+    python: "3.12"
+mkdocs:
+  configuration: mkdocs.yml
+python:
+   install:
+   - requirements: requirements.txt

.tx/config

@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+[main]
+host = https://app.transifex.com
+
+[o:netbox-community:p:netbox:r:9cbf4fcf95b3d92e4ebbf1a5e5d1caee]
+file_filter            = netbox/translations/<lang>/LC_MESSAGES/django.po
+source_file            = netbox/translations/en/LC_MESSAGES/django.po
+type                   = PO
+minimum_perc           = 0
+resource_name          = django.po
+replace_edited_strings = false
+keep_translations      = false
+

CHANGELOG.md

@@ -1 +1 @@
-The changelog has been moved to the [project release notes](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/release-notes/).
+The changelog has been moved to the [project release notes](https://docs.netbox.dev/en/stable/release-notes/).

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -1,192 +1,134 @@
-## Getting Help
+**Looking for help?** NetBox has a vast, active community of fellow users that may be able to provide assistance. Just [start a discussion](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions/new) right here on GitHub! Or if you'd prefer to chat, join us live in the `#netbox` channel on the [NetDev Community Slack](https://netdev.chat/)!
 
-If you encounter any issues installing or using NetBox, try one of the
-following resources to get assistance. Please **do not** open a GitHub issue
-except to report bugs or request features.
+<div align="center">
+  <h3>
+    :bug: <a href="#bug-reporting-bugs">Report a bug</a> &middot;
+    :bulb: <a href="#bulb-feature-requests">Suggest a feature</a> &middot;
+    :arrow_heading_up: <a href="#arrow_heading_up-submitting-pull-requests">Submit a pull request</a>
+  </h3>
+  <h3>
+    :jigsaw: <a href="#jigsaw-creating-plugins">Create a plugin</a> &middot;
+    :rescue_worker_helmet: <a href="#rescue_worker_helmet-become-a-maintainer">Become a maintainer</a> &middot;
+    :heart: <a href="#heart-other-ways-to-contribute">Other ideas</a>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+<h3></h3>
 
-### GitHub Discussions
+## :information_source: Welcome to the Stadium!
 
-GitHub's discussions are the best place to get help or propose rough ideas for
-new functionality. Their integration with GitHub allows for easily cross-
-referencing and converting posts to issues as needed. There are several
-categories for discussions:
+In her book [Working in Public](https://www.amazon.com/Working-Public-Making-Maintenance-Software/dp/0578675862), Nadia Eghbal defines four production models for open source projects, categorized by contributor and user growth: federations, clubs, toys, and stadiums. The NetBox project fits her definition of a stadium very well:
 
-* **General** - General community discussion
-* **Ideas** - Ideas for new functionality that isn't yet ready for a formal
-  feature request
-* **Q&A** - Request help with installing or using NetBox
+> Stadiums are projects with low contributor growth and high user growth. While they may receive casual contributions, their regular contributor base does not grow proportionately to their users. As a result, they tend to be powered by one or a few developers.
 
-### Mailing List
+The bulk of NetBox's development is carried out by a handful of core maintainers, with occasional contributions from collaborators in the community. We find the stadium analogy very useful in conveying the roles and obligations of both contributors and users.
 
-We also have a Google Groups [mailing list](https://groups.google.com/g/netbox-discuss)
-for general discussion, however we're encouraging people to use GitHub
-discussions where possible, as it's much easier for newcomers to review past
-discussions.
+If you're a contributor, actively working on the center stage, you have an obligation to produce quality content that will benefit the project as a whole. Conversely, if you're in the audience consuming the work being produced, you have the option of making requests and suggestions, but must also recognize that contributors are under no obligation to act on them.
 
-### Slack
+NetBox users are welcome to participate in either role, on stage or in the crowd. We ask only that you acknowledge the role you've chosen and respect the roles of others.
 
-For real-time chat, you can join the **#netbox** Slack channel on [NetDev Community](https://netdev.chat/).
-Unfortunately, the Slack channel does not provide long-term retention of chat
-history, so try to avoid it for any discussions would benefit from being
-preserved for future reference.
+### General Tips for Working on GitHub
 
-## Reporting Bugs
+* Register for a free [GitHub account](https://github.com/signup) if you haven't already.
+* You can use [GitHub Markdown](https://docs.github.com/en/get-started/writing-on-github/getting-started-with-writing-and-formatting-on-github/basic-writing-and-formatting-syntax) for formatting text and adding images.
+* To help mitigate notification spam, please avoid "bumping" issues with no activity. (To vote an issue up or down, use a :thumbsup: or :thumbsdown: reaction.)
+* Please avoid pinging members with `@` unless they've previously expressed interest or involvement with that particular issue.
+* Familiarize yourself with [this list of discussion anti-patterns](https://github.com/bradfitz/issue-tracker-behaviors) and make every effort to avoid them.
 
-* First, ensure that you're running the [latest stable version](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases)
-of NetBox. If you're running an older version, it's possible that the bug has
-already been fixed.
+## :bug: Reporting Bugs
 
-* Next, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues)
-to see if the bug you've found has already been reported. If you think you may
-be experiencing a reported issue that hasn't already been resolved, please
-click "add a reaction" in the top right corner of the issue and add a thumbs
-up (+1). You might also want to add a comment describing how it's affecting your
-installation. This will allow us to prioritize bugs based on how many users are
-affected.
+:warning: Bug reports are used to call attention to some unintended or unexpected behavior in NetBox, such as when an error occurs or when the result of taking some action is inconsistent with the documentation. **Bug reports may not be used to suggest new functionality**; please see "feature requests" below if that is your goal.
 
-* When submitting an issue, please be as descriptive as possible. Be sure to
-provide all information request in the issue template, including:
+* First, ensure that you're running the [latest stable version](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases) of NetBox. If you're running an older version, it's likely that the bug has already been fixed.
 
-    * The environment in which NetBox is running
-    * The exact steps that can be taken to reproduce the issue
-    * Expected and observed behavior
-    * Any error messages generated
-    * Screenshots (if applicable)
+* Next, search our [issues list](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues?q=is%3Aissue) to see if the bug you've found has already been reported. If you come across a bug report that seems to match, please click "add a reaction" in the bottom left corner of the issue and add a thumbs up ( :thumbsup: ). This will help draw more attention to it. Any comments you can add to provide additional information or context would also be much appreciated.
 
-* Please avoid prepending any sort of tag (e.g. "[Bug]") to the issue title.
-The issue will be reviewed by a maintainer after submission and the appropriate
-labels will be applied for categorization.
+* If you can't find any existing issues (open or closed) that seem to match yours, you're welcome to [submit a new bug report](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?label=type%3A+bug&template=bug_report.yaml). Be sure to complete the entire report template, including detailed steps that someone triaging your issue can follow to confirm the reported behavior. (If we're not able to replicate the bug based on the information provided, we'll ask for additional detail.)
 
-* Keep in mind that we prioritize bugs based on their severity and how much
-work is required to resolve them. It may take some time for someone to address
-your issue.
+* Some other tips to keep in mind:
+  * Error messages and screenshots are especially helpful.
+  * Don't prepend your issue title with a label like `[Bug]`; the proper label will be assigned automatically.
+  * Ensure that your reproduction instructions don't reference data in our [demo instance](https://demo.netbox.dev/), which gets rebuilt nightly.
+  * Verify that you have GitHub notifications enabled and are subscribed to your issue after submitting.
+  * We appreciate your patience as bugs are prioritized by their severity, impact, and difficulty to resolve.
 
 * For more information on how bug reports are handled, please see our [issue
 intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy).
 
-## Feature Requests
+## :bulb: Feature Requests
 
-* First, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues)
-to see if the feature you're requesting is already listed. (Be sure to search
-closed issues as well, since some feature requests have been rejected.) If the
-feature you'd like to see has already been requested and is open, click "add a
-reaction" in the top right corner of the issue and add a thumbs up (+1). This
-ensures that the issue has a better chance of receiving attention. Also feel
-free to add a comment with any additional justification for the feature.
-(However, note that comments with no substance other than a "+1" will be
-deleted. Please use GitHub's reactions feature to indicate your support.)
+* First, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues?q=is%3Aissue) to see if the feature you have in mind has already been proposed. If you happen to find an open feature request that matches your idea, click "add a reaction" in the top right corner of the issue and add a thumbs up ( :thumbsup: ). This ensures that the issue has a better chance of receiving attention. Also feel free to add a comment with any additional justification for the feature.
 
-* Due to a large backlog of feature requests, we are not currently accepting
-any proposals which substantially extend NetBox's functionality beyond its
-current feature set. This includes the introduction of any new views or models
-which have not already been proposed in an existing feature request.
+* Please don't submit duplicate issues! Sometimes we reject feature requests, for various reasons. Even if you disagree with those reasons, please **do not** submit a duplicate feature request. It is very disrepectful of the maintainers' time, and you may be barred from opening future issues.
 
-* Before filing a new feature request, consider raising your idea on the
-mailing list first. Feedback you receive there will help validate and shape the
-proposed feature before filing a formal issue.
+* If you have a rough idea that's not quite ready for formal submission yet, start a [GitHub discussion](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) instead. This is a great way to test the viability and narrow down the scope of a new feature prior to submitting a formal proposal, and can serve to generate interest in your idea from other community members.
 
-* Good feature requests are very narrowly defined. Be sure to thoroughly
-describe the functionality and data model(s) being proposed. The more effort
-you put into writing a feature request, the better its chance is of being
-implemented. Overly broad feature requests will be closed.
+* Once you're ready, submit a feature request [using this template](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?label=type%3A+feature&template=feature_request.yaml). Be sure to provide sufficient context and detail to convey exactly what you're proposing and why. The stronger your use case, the better chance your proposal has of being accepted.
 
-* When submitting a feature request on GitHub, be sure to include all
-information requested by the issue template, including:
+* Some other tips to keep in mind:
+  * Don't prepend your issue title with a label like `[Feature]`; the proper label will be assigned automatically.
+  * Try to anticipate any likely questions about your proposal and provide that information proactively.
+  * Verify that you have GitHub notifications enabled and are subscribed to your issue after submitting.
+  * You're welcome to volunteer to implement your FR, but don't submit a pull request until it has been approved.
 
-    * A detailed description of the proposed functionality
-    * A use case for the feature; who would use it and what value it would add
-      to NetBox
-    * A rough description of changes necessary to the database schema (if
-      applicable)
-    * Any third-party libraries or other resources which would be involved
+* For more information on how feature requests are handled, please see our [issue intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy).
 
-* Please avoid prepending any sort of tag (e.g. "[Feature]") to the issue
-title. The issue will be reviewed by a moderator after submission and the
-appropriate labels will be applied for categorization.
+## :arrow_heading_up: Submitting Pull Requests
 
-* For more information on how feature requests are handled, please see our
-[issue intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy).
+* [Pull requests](https://docs.github.com/en/pull-requests) (a feature of GitHub) are used to propose changes to NetBox's code base. Our process generally goes like this:
+  * A user opens a new issue (bug report or feature request)
+  * A maintainer triages the issue and may mark it as needing an owner
+  * The issue's author can volunteer to own it, or someone else can
+  * A maintainer assigns the issue to whomever volunteers
+  * The issue owner submits a pull request that will resolve the issue
+  * A maintainer reviews and merges the pull request, closing the issue
 
-## Submitting Pull Requests
+* It's very important that you not submit a pull request until a relevant issue has been opened **and** assigned to you. Otherwise, you risk wasting time on work that may ultimately not be needed.
 
-* If you're interested in contributing to NetBox, be sure to check out our
-[getting started](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/development/getting-started/)
-documentation for tips on setting up your development environment.
+* New pull requests should generally be based off of the `main` branch. This branch, in keeping with the [trunk-based development](https://trunkbaseddevelopment.com/) approach, is used for ongoing development and bug fixes and always represents the newest stable code, from which releases are periodically branched. (If you're developing for an upcoming minor release, use `feature` instead.)
 
-* Be sure to open an issue **before** starting work on a pull request, and
-discuss your idea with the NetBox maintainers before beginning work. This will
-help prevent wasting time on something that might we might not be able to
-implement. When suggesting a new feature, also make sure it won't conflict with
-any work that's already in progress.
+* In most cases, it is not necessary to add a changelog entry: A maintainer will take care of this when the PR is merged. (This helps avoid merge conflicts resulting from multiple PRs being submitted simultaneously.)
 
-* Once you've opened or identified an issue you'd like to work on, ask that it
-be assigned to you so that others are aware it's being worked on. A maintainer
-will then mark the issue as "accepted."
-
-* Any pull request which does _not_ relate to an **accepted** issue will be closed.
-
-* All new functionality must include relevant tests where applicable.
-
-* When submitting a pull request, please be sure to work off of the `develop`
-branch, rather than `master`. The `develop` branch is used for ongoing
-development, while `master` is used for tagging stable releases.
-
-* In most cases, it is not necessary to add a changelog entry: A maintainer will
-take care of this when the PR is merged. (This helps avoid merge conflicts
-resulting from multiple PRs being submitted simultaneously.)
-
-* All code submissions should meet the following criteria (CI will enforce
-these checks):
-
-    * Python syntax is valid
-    * All tests pass when run with `./manage.py test`
-    * PEP 8 compliance is enforced, with the exception that lines may be
+* All code submissions must meet the following criteria (CI will enforce these checks where feasible):
+  * Consist entirely of original work
+  * Python syntax is valid
+  * All tests pass when run with `./manage.py test`
+  * PEP 8 compliance is enforced, with the exception that lines may be
       greater than 80 characters in length
 
-## Commenting
+> [!CAUTION]
+> Any contributions which include AI-generated or reproduced content will be rejected.
 
-Only comment on an issue if you are sharing a relevant idea or constructive
-feedback. **Do not** comment on an issue just to show your support (give the
-top post a :+1: instead) or ask for an ETA. These comments will be deleted to
-reduce noise in the discussion.
+* Some other tips to keep in mind:
+  * If you'd like to volunteer for someone else's issue, please post a comment on that issue letting us know. (This will allow the maintainers to assign it to you.)
+  * Check out our [developer docs](https://docs.netbox.dev/en/stable/development/getting-started/) for tips on setting up your development environment.
+  * All new functionality must include relevant tests where applicable.
 
-## Issue Lifecycle
+## :jigsaw: Creating Plugins
 
-New issues are handled according to our [issue intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy).
-Maintainers will assign label(s) and/or close new issues as the policy
-dictates. This helps ensure a productive development environment and avoid
-accumulating a large backlog of work.
+Do you have an idea for something you'd like to build in NetBox, but might not be right for the core project? NetBox includes a powerful and extensive [plugins framework](https://docs.netbox.dev/en/stable/plugins/) that enables users to develop their own custom data models and integrations.
 
-The core maintainers group has chosen to make use of GitHub's [Stale bot](https://github.com/apps/stale)
-to aid in issue management.
+Check out our [plugin development tutorial](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-plugin-tutorial) to get started!
 
-* Issues will be marked as stale after 60 days of no activity.
-* If the stable label is not removed in the following 30 days, the issue will
-  be closed automatically.
-* Any issue bearing one of the following labels will be exempt from all Stale
-  bot actions:
-  * `status: accepted`
-  * `status: blocked`
-  * `status: needs milestone`
+## :rescue_worker_helmet: Become a Maintainer
 
-It is natural that some new issues get more attention than others. The stale
-bot helps bring renewed attention to potentially valuable issues that may have
-been overlooked. **Do not** comment on an issue that has been marked stale in
-an effort to circumvent the bot: Doing so will not remove the stale label.
-(Stale labels can be removed only by maintainers.)
+We're always looking for motivated individuals to join the maintainers team and help drive NetBox's long-term development. Some of our most sought-after skills include:
 
-## Maintainer Guidance
+* Python development with a strong focus on the [Django](https://www.djangoproject.com/) framework
+* Expertise working with PostgreSQL databases
+* Javascript & TypeScript proficiency
+* A knack for web application design (HTML & CSS)
+* Familiarity with git and software development best practices
+* Excellent attention to detail
+* Working experience in the field of network operations & engineering
 
-* Maintainers are expected to contribute at least four hours per week to the
-  project on average. This can be employer-sponsored or individual time, with
-  the understanding that all contributions are submitted under the Apache 2.0
-  license and that your employer may not make claim to any contributions.
-  Contributions include code work, issue management, and community support. All
-  development must be in accordance with our [development guidance](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/development/).
+We generally ask that maintainers dedicate around four hours of work to the project each week on average, which includes both hands-on development and project management tasks such as issue triage. Maintainers are also encouraged (but not required) to attend our bi-weekly Zoom call to catch up on recent items.
 
-* Maintainers are expected to attend (where feasible) our biweekly ~30-minute
-  sync to review agenda items. This meeting provides opportunity to present and
-  discuss pressing topics. Meetings are held as virtual audio/video conferences.
+Interested? You can contact our lead maintainer, Jeremy Stretch, at jeremy@netbox.dev or on the [NetDev Community Slack](https://netdev.chat/). We'd love to have you on the team!
 
-* Maintainers with no substantial recorded activity in a 60-day period will be
-  removed from the project.
+## :heart: Other Ways to Contribute
+
+You don't have to be a developer to contribute to NetBox: There are plenty of other ways you can add value to the community! Below are just a few examples:
+
+* Help answer questions and provide feedback in our [GitHub discussions](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) and on [Slack](https://netdev.chat/).
+* Write a blog article or record a YouTube video demonstrating how NetBox is used at your organization.
+* Help grow our [library of device & module type definitions](https://github.com/netbox-community/devicetype-library).

NOTICE

@@ -1 +1,7 @@
 Copyrighted and licensed under Apache License 2.0 by DigitalOcean, LLC.
+
+This project contains code developed expressly for NetBox, and its reuse in
+other projects may introduce issues affecting performance, data integrity,
+and security.
+
+For more information, please see https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox.

README.md

@@ -1,70 +1,117 @@
 <div align="center">
-  <img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/netbox-community/netbox/develop/docs/netbox_logo.svg" width="400" alt="NetBox logo" />
+  <img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/netbox-community/netbox/main/docs/netbox_logo_light.svg" width="400" alt="NetBox logo" />
+  <p><strong>The cornerstone of every automated network</strong></p>
+  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/v/release/netbox-community/netbox" alt="Latest release" /></a>
+  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/LICENSE.txt"><img src="https://img.shields.io/badge/license-Apache_2.0-blue.svg" alt="License" /></a>
+  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/graphs/contributors"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/contributors/netbox-community/netbox?color=blue" alt="Contributors" /></a>
+  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/stargazers"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/stars/netbox-community/netbox?style=flat" alt="GitHub stars" /></a>
+  <a href="https://explore.transifex.com/netbox-community/netbox/"><img src="https://img.shields.io/badge/languages-15-blue" alt="Languages supported" /></a>
+  <a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/actions/workflows/ci.yml"><img src="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/workflows/CI/badge.svg?branch=main" alt="CI status" /></a>
+  <p>
+    <strong><a href="https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/">NetBox Community</a></strong> |
+    <strong><a href="https://netboxlabs.com/netbox-cloud/">NetBox Cloud</a></strong> |
+    <strong><a href="https://netboxlabs.com/netbox-enterprise/">NetBox Enterprise</a></strong>
+  </p>
 </div>
 
-![Master branch build status](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/workflows/CI/badge.svg?branch=master)
+NetBox exists to empower network engineers. Since its release in 2016, it has become the go-to solution for modeling and documenting network infrastructure for thousands of organizations worldwide. As a successor to legacy IPAM and DCIM applications, NetBox provides a cohesive, extensive, and accessible data model for all things networked. By providing a single robust user interface and programmable APIs for everything from cable maps to device configurations, NetBox serves as the central source of truth for the modern network.
 
-NetBox is an infrastructure resource modeling (IRM) tool designed to empower
-network automation. Initially conceived by the network engineering team at
-[DigitalOcean](https://www.digitalocean.com/), NetBox was developed specifically
-to address the needs of network and infrastructure engineers. It is intended to
-function as a domain-specific source of truth for network operations.
+<p align="center">
+  <a href="#netboxs-role">NetBox's Role</a> |
+  <a href="#why-netbox">Why NetBox?</a> |
+  <a href="#getting-started">Getting Started</a> |
+  <a href="#get-involved">Get Involved</a> |
+  <a href="#screenshots">Screenshots</a>
+</p>
 
-NetBox runs as a web application atop the [Django](https://www.djangoproject.com/)
-Python framework with a [PostgreSQL](https://www.postgresql.org/) database. For a
-complete list of requirements, see `requirements.txt`. The code is available [on GitHub](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox).
+<p align="center">
+  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/home-light.png" width="600" alt="NetBox user interface screenshot" />
+</p>
 
-The complete documentation for NetBox can be found at [Read the Docs](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/). A public demo instance is available at https://demo.netbox.dev.
+## NetBox's Role
 
-<div align="center">
-  <h4>Thank you to our sponsors!</h4>
+NetBox functions as the **source of truth** for your network infrastructure. Its job is to define and validate the _intended state_ of all network components and resources. NetBox does not interact with network nodes directly; rather, it makes this data available programmatically to purpose-built automation, monitoring, and assurance tools. This separation of duties enables the construction of a robust yet flexible automation system.
 
-  [![DigitalOcean](https://raw.githubusercontent.com/wiki/netbox-community/netbox/images/sponsors/digitalocean.png)](https://try.digitalocean.com/developer-cloud)
-  &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
-  [![Equinix Metal](https://raw.githubusercontent.com/wiki/netbox-community/netbox/images/sponsors/equinix.png)](https://metal.equinix.com/)
-  &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
-  [![NS1](https://raw.githubusercontent.com/wiki/netbox-community/netbox/images/sponsors/ns1.png)](https://ns1.com/)
-  <br />
-  [![Stellar Technologies](https://raw.githubusercontent.com/wiki/netbox-community/netbox/images/sponsors/stellar.png)](https://stellar.tech/)
+<p align="center">
+  <img src="docs/media/misc/reference_architecture.png" alt="Reference network automation architecture" />
+</p>
 
-</div>
+The diagram above illustrates the recommended deployment architecture for an automated network, leveraging NetBox as the central authority for network state. This approach allows your team to swap out individual tools to meet changing needs while retaining a predictable, modular workflow.
 
-### Discussion
+## Why NetBox?
 
-* [GitHub Discussions](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) - Discussion forum hosted by GitHub; ideal for Q&A and other structured discussions
-* [Slack](https://netdev.chat/) - Real-time chat hosted by the NetDev Community; best for unstructured discussion or just hanging out
-* [Google Group](https://groups.google.com/g/netbox-discuss) - Legacy mailing list; slowly being replaced by GitHub discussions
+### Comprehensive Data Model
 
-### Installation
+Racks, devices, cables, IP addresses, VLANs, circuits, power, VPNs, and lots more: NetBox is built for networks. Its comprehensive and thoroughly inter-linked data model provides for natural and highly structured modeling of myriad network primitives that just isn't possible using general-purpose tools. And there's no need to waste time contemplating how to build out a database: Everything is ready to go upon installation.
 
-Please see [the documentation](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) for
-instructions on installing NetBox. To upgrade NetBox, please download the
-[latest release](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases) and
-run `upgrade.sh`.
+### Focused Development
 
-### Providing Feedback
+NetBox strives to meet a singular goal: Provide the best available solution for making network infrastructure programmatically accessible. Unlike "all-in-one" tools which awkwardly bolt on half-baked features in an attempt to check every box, NetBox is committed to its core function. NetBox provides the best possible solution for modeling network infrastructure, and provides rich APIs for integrating with tools that excel in other areas of network automation.
 
-The best platform for general feedback, assistance, and other discussion is our
-[GitHub discussions](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions).
-To report a bug or request a specific feature, please open a GitHub issue using
-the [appropriate template](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new/choose).
+### Extensible and Customizable
 
-If you are interested in contributing to the development of NetBox, please read
-our [contributing guide](CONTRIBUTING.md) prior to beginning any work.
+No two networks are exactly the same. Users are empowered to extend NetBox's native data model with custom fields and tags to best suit their unique needs. You can even write your own plugins to introduce entirely new objects and functionality!
 
-### Screenshots
+### Flexible Permissions
 
-![Screenshot of main page (light mode)](docs/media/screenshots/home-light.png "Main page (light mode)")
+NetBox includes a fully customizable permission system, which affords administrators incredible granularity when assigning roles to users and groups. Want to restrict certain users to working only with cabling and not be able to change IP addresses? Or maybe each team should have access only to a particular tenant? NetBox enables you to craft roles as you see fit.
 
-![Screenshot of main page (dark mode)](docs/media/screenshots/home-dark.png "Main page (dark mode)")
+### Custom Validation & Protection Rules
 
-![Screenshot of rack elevation](docs/media/screenshots/rack.png "Rack elevation")
+The data you put into NetBox is crucial to network operations. In addition to its robust native validation rules, NetBox provides mechanisms for administrators to define their own custom validation rules for objects. Custom validation can be used both to ensure new or modified objects adhere to a set of rules, and to prevent the deletion of objects which don't meet certain criteria. (For example, you might want to prevent the deletion of a device with an "active" status.)
 
-![Screenshot of prefixes hierarchy](docs/media/screenshots/prefixes-list.png "Prefixes hierarchy")
+### Device Configuration Rendering
 
-![Screenshot of cable trace](docs/media/screenshots/cable-trace.png "Cable tracing")
+NetBox can render user-created Jinja2 templates to generate device configurations from its own data. Configuration templates can be uploaded individually or pulled automatically from an external source, such as a git repository. Rendered configurations can be retrieved via the REST API for application directly to network devices via a provisioning tool such as Ansible or Salt.
 
-### Related projects
+### Custom Scripts
 
-Please see [our wiki](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Community-Contributions)
-for a list of relevant community projects.
+Complex workflows, such as provisioning a new branch office, can be tedious to carry out via the user interface. NetBox allows you to write and upload custom scripts that can be run directly from the UI. Scripts prompt users for input and then automate the necessary tasks to greatly simplify otherwise burdensome processes.
+
+### Automated Events
+
+Users can define event rules to automatically trigger a custom script or outbound webhook in response to a NetBox event. For example, you might want to automatically update a network monitoring service whenever a new device is added to NetBox, or update a DHCP server when an IP range is allocated.
+
+### Comprehensive Change Logging
+
+NetBox automatically logs the creation, modification, and deletion of all managed objects, providing a thorough change history. Changes can be attributed to the executing user, and related changes are grouped automatically by request ID.
+
+> [!NOTE]
+> A complete list of NetBox's myriad features can be found in [the introductory documentation](https://docs.netbox.dev/en/stable/introduction/).
+
+## Getting Started
+
+* Just want to explore? Check out [our public demo](https://demo.netbox.dev/) right now!
+* The [official documentation](https://docs.netbox.dev) offers a comprehensive introduction.
+* Check out [our wiki](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Community-Contributions) for even more projects to get the most out of NetBox!
+
+## Get Involved
+
+* Follow [@NetBoxOfficial](https://twitter.com/NetBoxOfficial) on Twitter!
+* Join the conversation on [the discussion forum](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) and [Slack](https://netdev.chat/)!
+* Already a power user? You can [suggest a feature](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?assignees=&labels=type%3A+feature&template=feature_request.yaml) or [report a bug](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?assignees=&labels=type%3A+bug&template=bug_report.yaml) on GitHub.
+* Contributions from the community are encouraged and appreciated! Check out our [contributing guide](CONTRIBUTING.md) to get started.
+* [Share your idea](https://plugin-ideas.netbox.dev/) for a new plugin, or [learn how to build one](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-plugin-tutorial) yourself!
+
+## Screenshots
+
+<p align="center">
+  <strong>NetBox Dashboard (Light Mode)</strong><br />
+  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/home-light.png" width="600" alt="NetBox dashboard (light mode)" />
+</p>
+<p align="center">
+  <strong>NetBox Dashboard (Dark Mode)</strong><br />
+  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/home-dark.png" width="600" alt="NetBox dashboard (dark mode)" />
+</p>
+<p align="center">
+  <strong>Prefixes List</strong><br />
+  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/prefixes-list.png" width="600" alt="Prefixes list" />
+</p>
+<p align="center">
+  <strong>Rack View</strong><br />
+  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/rack.png" width="600" alt="Rack view" />
+</p>
+<p align="center">
+  <strong>Cable Trace</strong><br />
+  <img src="docs/media/screenshots/cable-trace.png" width="600" alt="Cable trace" />
+</p>

SECURITY.md

@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+# Security Policy
+
+## No Warranty
+
+Per the terms of the Apache 2 license, NetBox is offered "as is" and without any guarantee or warranty pertaining to its operation. While every reasonable effort is made by its maintainers to ensure the product remains free of security vulnerabilities, users are ultimately responsible for conducting their own evaluations of each software release.
+
+## Recommendations
+
+Administrators are encouraged to adhere to industry best practices concerning the secure operation of software, such as:
+
+* Do not expose your NetBox installation to the public Internet
+* Do not permit multiple users to share an account
+* Enforce minimum password complexity requirements for local accounts
+* Prohibit access to your database from clients other than the NetBox application
+* Keep your deployment updated to the most recent stable release
+
+## Reporting a Suspected Vulnerability
+
+If you believe you've uncovered a security vulnerability and wish to report it confidentially, you may do so by emailing `security@netboxlabs.com`. Please ensure that your report meets all the following conditions:
+
+* Affects the most recent stable release of NetBox, or a current beta release
+* Affects a NetBox instance installed and configured per the official documentation
+* Is reproducible following a prescribed set of instructions
+
+Please note that we **DO NOT** accept reports generated by automated tooling which merely suggest that a file or file(s) _may_ be vulnerable under certain conditions, as these are most often innocuous.
+
+For any security concerns regarding the community-maintained Docker image for NetBox, please see the [netbox-docker](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-docker) project.
+
+### Bug Bounties
+
+As NetBox is provided as free open source software, we do not offer any monetary compensation for vulnerability or bug reports, however your contributions are greatly appreciated.

base_requirements.txt

@@ -1,49 +1,53 @@
 # The Python web framework on which NetBox is built
-# https://github.com/django/django
-Django
+# https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/releases/
+Django<5.2
 
 # Django middleware which permits cross-domain API requests
-# https://github.com/OttoYiu/django-cors-headers
+# https://github.com/adamchainz/django-cors-headers/blob/main/CHANGELOG.rst
 django-cors-headers
 
 # Runtime UI tool for debugging Django
-# https://github.com/jazzband/django-debug-toolbar
+# https://github.com/jazzband/django-debug-toolbar/blob/main/docs/changes.rst
 django-debug-toolbar
 
 # Library for writing reusable URL query filters
-# https://github.com/carltongibson/django-filter
+# https://github.com/carltongibson/django-filter/blob/main/CHANGES.rst
 django-filter
 
-# Django debug toolbar extension with support for GraphiQL
-# https://github.com/flavors/django-graphiql-debug-toolbar/
-django-graphiql-debug-toolbar
+# HTMX utilities for Django
+# https://django-htmx.readthedocs.io/en/latest/changelog.html
+django-htmx
 
 # Modified Preorder Tree Traversal (recursive nesting of objects)
-# https://github.com/django-mptt/django-mptt
+# https://github.com/django-mptt/django-mptt/blob/main/CHANGELOG.rst
 django-mptt
 
 # Context managers for PostgreSQL advisory locks
-# https://github.com/Xof/django-pglocks
+# https://github.com/Xof/django-pglocks/blob/master/CHANGES.txt
 django-pglocks
 
 # Prometheus metrics library for Django
-# https://github.com/korfuri/django-prometheus
+# https://github.com/korfuri/django-prometheus/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
 django-prometheus
 
-# Django chaching backend using Redis
-# https://github.com/jazzband/django-redis
+# Django caching backend using Redis
+# https://github.com/jazzband/django-redis/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
 django-redis
 
+# Django extensions for Rich (terminal text rendering)
+# https://github.com/adamchainz/django-rich/blob/main/CHANGELOG.rst
+django-rich
+
 # Django integration for RQ (Reqis queuing)
-# https://github.com/rq/django-rq
+# https://github.com/rq/django-rq/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
 django-rq
 
 # Abstraction models for rendering and paginating HTML tables
-# https://github.com/jieter/django-tables2
+# https://github.com/jieter/django-tables2/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
 django-tables2
 
 # User-defined tags for objects
-# https://github.com/alex/django-taggit
+# https://github.com/jazzband/django-taggit/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
 django-taggit
 
 # A Django field for representing time zones
@@ -51,61 +55,95 @@ django-taggit
 django-timezone-field
 
 # A REST API framework for Django projects
-# https://github.com/encode/django-rest-framework
+# https://www.django-rest-framework.org/community/release-notes/
 djangorestframework
 
-# Swagger/OpenAPI schema generation for REST APIs
-# https://github.com/axnsan12/drf-yasg
-drf-yasg[validation]
+# Sane and flexible OpenAPI 3 schema generation for Django REST framework.
+# https://github.com/tfranzel/drf-spectacular/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
+drf-spectacular
 
-# Django wrapper for Graphene (GraphQL support)
-# https://github.com/graphql-python/graphene-django
-graphene_django
+# Serve self-contained distribution builds of Swagger UI and Redoc with Django.
+# https://github.com/tfranzel/drf-spectacular-sidecar
+drf-spectacular-sidecar
+
+# RSS feed parser
+# https://github.com/kurtmckee/feedparser/blob/develop/CHANGELOG.rst
+feedparser
 
 # WSGI HTTP server
-# https://gunicorn.org/
+# https://docs.gunicorn.org/en/latest/news.html
 gunicorn
 
 # Platform-agnostic template rendering engine
-# https://github.com/pallets/jinja
+# https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/changes/
 Jinja2
 
 # Simple markup language for rendering HTML
-# https://github.com/Python-Markdown/markdown
+# https://python-markdown.github.io/changelog/
 Markdown
 
-# File inclusion plugin for Python-Markdown
-# https://github.com/cmacmackin/markdown-include
-markdown-include
-
 # MkDocs Material theme (for documentation build)
-# https://github.com/squidfunk/mkdocs-material
+# https://squidfunk.github.io/mkdocs-material/changelog/
 mkdocs-material
 
+# Introspection for embedded code
+# https://github.com/mkdocstrings/mkdocstrings/blob/main/CHANGELOG.md
+# See #18568
+mkdocstrings[python-legacy]==0.27.0
+
 # Library for manipulating IP prefixes and addresses
-# https://github.com/drkjam/netaddr
+# https://github.com/netaddr/netaddr/blob/master/CHANGELOG.rst
 netaddr
 
+# Python bindings to the ammonia HTML sanitization library.
+# https://github.com/messense/nh3
+nh3
+
 # Fork of PIL (Python Imaging Library) for image processing
-# https://github.com/python-pillow/Pillow
+# https://github.com/python-pillow/Pillow/releases
 Pillow
 
 # PostgreSQL database adapter for Python
-# https://github.com/psycopg/psycopg2
-psycopg2-binary
+# https://github.com/psycopg/psycopg/blob/master/docs/news.rst
+psycopg[c,pool]
 
 # YAML rendering library
-# https://github.com/yaml/pyyaml
+# https://github.com/yaml/pyyaml/blob/master/CHANGES
 PyYAML
 
-# In-memory key/value store used for caching and queuing
-# https://github.com/andymccurdy/redis-py
-redis
+# Requests
+# https://github.com/psf/requests/blob/main/HISTORY.md
+requests
+
+# rq
+# https://github.com/rq/rq/blob/master/CHANGES.md
+rq
+
+# Social authentication framework
+# https://github.com/python-social-auth/social-core/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
+social-auth-core
+
+# Django app for social-auth-core
+# https://github.com/python-social-auth/social-app-django/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md
+social-auth-app-django
+
+# Strawberry GraphQL
+# https://github.com/strawberry-graphql/strawberry/blob/main/CHANGELOG.md
+strawberry-graphql
+
+# Strawberry GraphQL Django extension
+# https://github.com/strawberry-graphql/strawberry-django/releases
+# Pinned to v0.52.0 for suspected upstream bug; see #18329
+strawberry-graphql-django==0.52.0
 
 # SVG image rendering (used for rack elevations)
-# https://github.com/mozman/svgwrite
+# https://github.com/mozman/svgwrite/blob/master/NEWS.rst
 svgwrite
 
 # Tabular dataset library (for table-based exports)
-# https://github.com/jazzband/tablib
+# https://github.com/jazzband/tablib/blob/master/HISTORY.md
 tablib
+
+# Timezone data (required by django-timezone-field on Python 3.9+)
+# https://github.com/python/tzdata/blob/master/NEWS.md
+tzdata

contrib/apache.conf

@@ -1,3 +1,12 @@
+<VirtualHost *:80>
+    # CHANGE THIS TO YOUR SERVER'S NAME
+    ServerName netbox.example.com
+
+    RewriteEngine On
+    RewriteCond %{HTTPS} !=on
+    RewriteRule ^/?(.*) https://%{SERVER_NAME}/$1 [R,L]
+</VirtualHost>
+
 <VirtualHost *:443>
     ProxyPreserveHost On
 
@@ -11,7 +20,7 @@
     Alias /static /opt/netbox/netbox/static
 
     <Directory /opt/netbox/netbox/static>
-        Options Indexes FollowSymLinks MultiViews
+        Options FollowSymLinks MultiViews
         AllowOverride None
         Require all granted
     </Directory>

contrib/generated_schema.json

@@ -0,0 +1,609 @@
+{
+    "type": "object",
+    "$id": "urn:devicetype-library:generated-schema",
+    "$schema": "https://json-schema.org/draft/2020-12/schema",
+    "additionalProperties": false,
+    "definitions": {
+        "airflow": {
+            "type": "string",
+            "enum": [
+                "front-to-rear",
+                "rear-to-front",
+                "left-to-right",
+                "right-to-left",
+                "side-to-rear",
+                "rear-to-side",
+                "bottom-to-top",
+                "top-to-bottom",
+                "passive",
+                "mixed"
+            ]
+        },
+        "weight-unit": {
+            "type": "string",
+            "enum": [
+                "kg",
+                "g",
+                "lb",
+                "oz"
+            ]
+        },
+        "subdevice-role": {
+            "type": "string",
+            "enum": [
+                "parent",
+                "child"
+            ]
+        },
+        "console-port": {
+            "type": "object",
+            "properties": {
+                "type": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "de-9",
+                        "db-25",
+                        "rj-11",
+                        "rj-12",
+                        "rj-45",
+                        "mini-din-8",
+                        "usb-a",
+                        "usb-b",
+                        "usb-c",
+                        "usb-mini-a",
+                        "usb-mini-b",
+                        "usb-micro-a",
+                        "usb-micro-b",
+                        "usb-micro-ab",
+                        "other"
+                    ]
+                }
+            }
+        },
+        "console-server-port": {
+            "type": "object",
+            "properties": {
+                "type": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "de-9",
+                        "db-25",
+                        "rj-11",
+                        "rj-12",
+                        "rj-45",
+                        "mini-din-8",
+                        "usb-a",
+                        "usb-b",
+                        "usb-c",
+                        "usb-mini-a",
+                        "usb-mini-b",
+                        "usb-micro-a",
+                        "usb-micro-b",
+                        "usb-micro-ab",
+                        "other"
+                    ]
+                }
+            }
+        },
+        "power-port": {
+            "type": "object",
+            "properties": {
+                "type": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "iec-60320-c6",
+                        "iec-60320-c8",
+                        "iec-60320-c14",
+                        "iec-60320-c16",
+                        "iec-60320-c20",
+                        "iec-60320-c22",
+                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-4h",
+                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-6h",
+                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-9h",
+                        "iec-60309-2p-e-4h",
+                        "iec-60309-2p-e-6h",
+                        "iec-60309-2p-e-9h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-e-4h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-e-6h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-e-9h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-4h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-6h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-9h",
+                        "iec-60906-1",
+                        "nbr-14136-10a",
+                        "nbr-14136-20a",
+                        "nema-1-15p",
+                        "nema-5-15p",
+                        "nema-5-20p",
+                        "nema-5-30p",
+                        "nema-5-50p",
+                        "nema-6-15p",
+                        "nema-6-20p",
+                        "nema-6-30p",
+                        "nema-6-50p",
+                        "nema-10-30p",
+                        "nema-10-50p",
+                        "nema-14-20p",
+                        "nema-14-30p",
+                        "nema-14-50p",
+                        "nema-14-60p",
+                        "nema-15-15p",
+                        "nema-15-20p",
+                        "nema-15-30p",
+                        "nema-15-50p",
+                        "nema-15-60p",
+                        "nema-l1-15p",
+                        "nema-l5-15p",
+                        "nema-l5-20p",
+                        "nema-l5-30p",
+                        "nema-l5-50p",
+                        "nema-l6-15p",
+                        "nema-l6-20p",
+                        "nema-l6-30p",
+                        "nema-l6-50p",
+                        "nema-l10-30p",
+                        "nema-l14-20p",
+                        "nema-l14-30p",
+                        "nema-l14-50p",
+                        "nema-l14-60p",
+                        "nema-l15-20p",
+                        "nema-l15-30p",
+                        "nema-l15-50p",
+                        "nema-l15-60p",
+                        "nema-l21-20p",
+                        "nema-l21-30p",
+                        "nema-l22-20p",
+                        "nema-l22-30p",
+                        "cs6361c",
+                        "cs6365c",
+                        "cs8165c",
+                        "cs8265c",
+                        "cs8365c",
+                        "cs8465c",
+                        "ita-c",
+                        "ita-e",
+                        "ita-f",
+                        "ita-ef",
+                        "ita-g",
+                        "ita-h",
+                        "ita-i",
+                        "ita-j",
+                        "ita-k",
+                        "ita-l",
+                        "ita-m",
+                        "ita-n",
+                        "ita-o",
+                        "usb-a",
+                        "usb-b",
+                        "usb-c",
+                        "usb-mini-a",
+                        "usb-mini-b",
+                        "usb-micro-a",
+                        "usb-micro-b",
+                        "usb-micro-ab",
+                        "usb-3-b",
+                        "usb-3-micro-b",
+                        "molex-micro-fit-1x2",
+                        "molex-micro-fit-2x2",
+                        "molex-micro-fit-2x4",
+                        "dc-terminal",
+                        "saf-d-grid",
+                        "neutrik-powercon-20",
+                        "neutrik-powercon-32",
+                        "neutrik-powercon-true1",
+                        "neutrik-powercon-true1-top",
+                        "ubiquiti-smartpower",
+                        "hardwired",
+                        "other"
+                    ]
+                }
+            }
+        },
+        "power-outlet": {
+            "type": "object",
+            "properties": {
+                "type": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "iec-60320-c5",
+                        "iec-60320-c7",
+                        "iec-60320-c13",
+                        "iec-60320-c15",
+                        "iec-60320-c19",
+                        "iec-60320-c21",
+                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-4h",
+                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-6h",
+                        "iec-60309-p-n-e-9h",
+                        "iec-60309-2p-e-4h",
+                        "iec-60309-2p-e-6h",
+                        "iec-60309-2p-e-9h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-e-4h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-e-6h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-e-9h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-4h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-6h",
+                        "iec-60309-3p-n-e-9h",
+                        "iec-60906-1",
+                        "nbr-14136-10a",
+                        "nbr-14136-20a",
+                        "nema-1-15r",
+                        "nema-5-15r",
+                        "nema-5-20r",
+                        "nema-5-30r",
+                        "nema-5-50r",
+                        "nema-6-15r",
+                        "nema-6-20r",
+                        "nema-6-30r",
+                        "nema-6-50r",
+                        "nema-10-30r",
+                        "nema-10-50r",
+                        "nema-14-20r",
+                        "nema-14-30r",
+                        "nema-14-50r",
+                        "nema-14-60r",
+                        "nema-15-15r",
+                        "nema-15-20r",
+                        "nema-15-30r",
+                        "nema-15-50r",
+                        "nema-15-60r",
+                        "nema-l1-15r",
+                        "nema-l5-15r",
+                        "nema-l5-20r",
+                        "nema-l5-30r",
+                        "nema-l5-50r",
+                        "nema-l6-15r",
+                        "nema-l6-20r",
+                        "nema-l6-30r",
+                        "nema-l6-50r",
+                        "nema-l10-30r",
+                        "nema-l14-20r",
+                        "nema-l14-30r",
+                        "nema-l14-50r",
+                        "nema-l14-60r",
+                        "nema-l15-20r",
+                        "nema-l15-30r",
+                        "nema-l15-50r",
+                        "nema-l15-60r",
+                        "nema-l21-20r",
+                        "nema-l21-30r",
+                        "nema-l22-20r",
+                        "nema-l22-30r",
+                        "CS6360C",
+                        "CS6364C",
+                        "CS8164C",
+                        "CS8264C",
+                        "CS8364C",
+                        "CS8464C",
+                        "ita-e",
+                        "ita-f",
+                        "ita-g",
+                        "ita-h",
+                        "ita-i",
+                        "ita-j",
+                        "ita-k",
+                        "ita-l",
+                        "ita-m",
+                        "ita-n",
+                        "ita-o",
+                        "ita-multistandard",
+                        "usb-a",
+                        "usb-micro-b",
+                        "usb-c",
+                        "molex-micro-fit-1x2",
+                        "molex-micro-fit-2x2",
+                        "molex-micro-fit-2x4",
+                        "dc-terminal",
+                        "eaton-c39",
+                        "hdot-cx",
+                        "saf-d-grid",
+                        "neutrik-powercon-20a",
+                        "neutrik-powercon-32a",
+                        "neutrik-powercon-true1",
+                        "neutrik-powercon-true1-top",
+                        "ubiquiti-smartpower",
+                        "hardwired",
+                        "other"
+                    ]
+                },
+                "feed-leg": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "A",
+                        "B",
+                        "C"
+                    ]
+                }
+            }
+        },
+        "interface": {
+            "type": "object",
+            "properties": {
+                "type": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "virtual",
+                        "bridge",
+                        "lag",
+                        "100base-fx",
+                        "100base-lfx",
+                        "100base-tx",
+                        "100base-t1",
+                        "1000base-t",
+                        "1000base-lx",
+                        "1000base-tx",
+                        "2.5gbase-t",
+                        "5gbase-t",
+                        "10gbase-t",
+                        "10gbase-cx4",
+                        "100base-x-sfp",
+                        "1000base-x-gbic",
+                        "1000base-x-sfp",
+                        "10gbase-x-sfpp",
+                        "10gbase-x-xfp",
+                        "10gbase-x-xenpak",
+                        "10gbase-x-x2",
+                        "25gbase-x-sfp28",
+                        "50gbase-x-sfp56",
+                        "40gbase-x-qsfpp",
+                        "50gbase-x-sfp28",
+                        "100gbase-x-cfp",
+                        "100gbase-x-cfp2",
+                        "200gbase-x-cfp2",
+                        "400gbase-x-cfp2",
+                        "100gbase-x-cfp4",
+                        "100gbase-x-cxp",
+                        "100gbase-x-cpak",
+                        "100gbase-x-dsfp",
+                        "100gbase-x-sfpdd",
+                        "100gbase-x-qsfp28",
+                        "100gbase-x-qsfpdd",
+                        "200gbase-x-qsfp56",
+                        "200gbase-x-qsfpdd",
+                        "400gbase-x-qsfp112",
+                        "400gbase-x-qsfpdd",
+                        "400gbase-x-osfp",
+                        "400gbase-x-osfp-rhs",
+                        "400gbase-x-cdfp",
+                        "400gbase-x-cfp8",
+                        "800gbase-x-qsfpdd",
+                        "800gbase-x-osfp",
+                        "1000base-kx",
+                        "2.5gbase-kx",
+                        "5gbase-kr",
+                        "10gbase-kr",
+                        "10gbase-kx4",
+                        "25gbase-kr",
+                        "40gbase-kr4",
+                        "50gbase-kr",
+                        "100gbase-kp4",
+                        "100gbase-kr2",
+                        "100gbase-kr4",
+                        "ieee802.11a",
+                        "ieee802.11g",
+                        "ieee802.11n",
+                        "ieee802.11ac",
+                        "ieee802.11ad",
+                        "ieee802.11ax",
+                        "ieee802.11ay",
+                        "ieee802.11be",
+                        "ieee802.15.1",
+                        "ieee802.15.4",
+                        "other-wireless",
+                        "gsm",
+                        "cdma",
+                        "lte",
+                        "4g",
+                        "5g",
+                        "sonet-oc3",
+                        "sonet-oc12",
+                        "sonet-oc48",
+                        "sonet-oc192",
+                        "sonet-oc768",
+                        "sonet-oc1920",
+                        "sonet-oc3840",
+                        "1gfc-sfp",
+                        "2gfc-sfp",
+                        "4gfc-sfp",
+                        "8gfc-sfpp",
+                        "16gfc-sfpp",
+                        "32gfc-sfp28",
+                        "32gfc-sfpp",
+                        "64gfc-qsfpp",
+                        "64gfc-sfpdd",
+                        "64gfc-sfpp",
+                        "128gfc-qsfp28",
+                        "infiniband-sdr",
+                        "infiniband-ddr",
+                        "infiniband-qdr",
+                        "infiniband-fdr10",
+                        "infiniband-fdr",
+                        "infiniband-edr",
+                        "infiniband-hdr",
+                        "infiniband-ndr",
+                        "infiniband-xdr",
+                        "t1",
+                        "e1",
+                        "t3",
+                        "e3",
+                        "xdsl",
+                        "docsis",
+                        "bpon",
+                        "epon",
+                        "10g-epon",
+                        "gpon",
+                        "xg-pon",
+                        "xgs-pon",
+                        "ng-pon2",
+                        "25g-pon",
+                        "50g-pon",
+                        "cisco-stackwise",
+                        "cisco-stackwise-plus",
+                        "cisco-flexstack",
+                        "cisco-flexstack-plus",
+                        "cisco-stackwise-80",
+                        "cisco-stackwise-160",
+                        "cisco-stackwise-320",
+                        "cisco-stackwise-480",
+                        "cisco-stackwise-1t",
+                        "juniper-vcp",
+                        "extreme-summitstack",
+                        "extreme-summitstack-128",
+                        "extreme-summitstack-256",
+                        "extreme-summitstack-512",
+                        "other"
+                    ]
+                },
+                "poe_mode": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "pd",
+                        "pse"
+                    ]
+                },
+                "poe_type": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "type1-ieee802.3af",
+                        "type2-ieee802.3at",
+                        "type3-ieee802.3bt",
+                        "type4-ieee802.3bt",
+                        "passive-24v-2pair",
+                        "passive-24v-4pair",
+                        "passive-48v-2pair",
+                        "passive-48v-4pair"
+                    ]
+                }
+            }
+        },
+        "front-port": {
+            "type": "object",
+            "properties": {
+                "type": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "8p8c",
+                        "8p6c",
+                        "8p4c",
+                        "8p2c",
+                        "6p6c",
+                        "6p4c",
+                        "6p2c",
+                        "4p4c",
+                        "4p2c",
+                        "gg45",
+                        "tera-4p",
+                        "tera-2p",
+                        "tera-1p",
+                        "110-punch",
+                        "bnc",
+                        "f",
+                        "n",
+                        "mrj21",
+                        "fc",
+                        "lc",
+                        "lc-pc",
+                        "lc-upc",
+                        "lc-apc",
+                        "lsh",
+                        "lsh-pc",
+                        "lsh-upc",
+                        "lsh-apc",
+                        "lx5",
+                        "lx5-pc",
+                        "lx5-upc",
+                        "lx5-apc",
+                        "mpo",
+                        "mtrj",
+                        "sc",
+                        "sc-pc",
+                        "sc-upc",
+                        "sc-apc",
+                        "st",
+                        "cs",
+                        "sn",
+                        "sma-905",
+                        "sma-906",
+                        "urm-p2",
+                        "urm-p4",
+                        "urm-p8",
+                        "splice",
+                        "usb-a",
+                        "usb-b",
+                        "usb-c",
+                        "usb-mini-a",
+                        "usb-mini-b",
+                        "usb-micro-a",
+                        "usb-micro-b",
+                        "usb-micro-ab",
+                        "other"
+                    ]
+                }
+            }
+        },
+        "rear-port": {
+            "type": "object",
+            "properties": {
+                "type": {
+                    "type": "string",
+                    "enum": [
+                        "8p8c",
+                        "8p6c",
+                        "8p4c",
+                        "8p2c",
+                        "6p6c",
+                        "6p4c",
+                        "6p2c",
+                        "4p4c",
+                        "4p2c",
+                        "gg45",
+                        "tera-4p",
+                        "tera-2p",
+                        "tera-1p",
+                        "110-punch",
+                        "bnc",
+                        "f",
+                        "n",
+                        "mrj21",
+                        "fc",
+                        "lc",
+                        "lc-pc",
+                        "lc-upc",
+                        "lc-apc",
+                        "lsh",
+                        "lsh-pc",
+                        "lsh-upc",
+                        "lsh-apc",
+                        "lx5",
+                        "lx5-pc",
+                        "lx5-upc",
+                        "lx5-apc",
+                        "mpo",
+                        "mtrj",
+                        "sc",
+                        "sc-pc",
+                        "sc-upc",
+                        "sc-apc",
+                        "st",
+                        "cs",
+                        "sn",
+                        "sma-905",
+                        "sma-906",
+                        "urm-p2",
+                        "urm-p4",
+                        "urm-p8",
+                        "splice",
+                        "usb-a",
+                        "usb-b",
+                        "usb-c",
+                        "usb-mini-a",
+                        "usb-mini-b",
+                        "usb-micro-a",
+                        "usb-micro-b",
+                        "usb-micro-ab",
+                        "other"
+                    ]
+                }
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}

contrib/gunicorn.py

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# The IP address (typically localhost) and port that the Netbox WSGI process should listen on
+# The IP address (typically localhost) and port that the NetBox WSGI process should listen on
 bind = '127.0.0.1:8001'
 
 # Number of gunicorn workers to spawn. This should typically be 2n+1, where
@@ -14,3 +14,7 @@ timeout = 120
 # The maximum number of requests a worker can handle before being respawned
 max_requests = 5000
 max_requests_jitter = 500
+
+# Uncomment this line to accept HTTP headers containing underscores, e.g. for remote
+# authentication support. See https://docs.gunicorn.org/en/stable/settings.html#header-map
+# header-map = 'dangerous'

contrib/netbox-housekeeping.service

@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+[Unit]
+Description=NetBox Housekeeping Service
+Documentation=https://docs.netbox.dev/
+After=network-online.target
+Wants=network-online.target
+
+[Service]
+Type=simple
+
+User=netbox
+Group=netbox
+WorkingDirectory=/opt/netbox
+
+ExecStart=/opt/netbox/venv/bin/python /opt/netbox/netbox/manage.py housekeeping
+
+[Install]
+WantedBy=multi-user.target

contrib/netbox-housekeeping.timer

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+[Unit]
+Description=NetBox Housekeeping Timer
+Documentation=https://docs.netbox.dev/
+After=network-online.target
+Wants=network-online.target
+
+[Timer]
+OnCalendar=daily
+AccuracySec=1h
+Persistent=true
+
+[Install]
+WantedBy=multi-user.target

contrib/netbox-rq.service

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 [Unit]
 Description=NetBox Request Queue Worker
-Documentation=https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/
+Documentation=https://docs.netbox.dev/
 After=network-online.target
 Wants=network-online.target
 

contrib/netbox.service

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 [Unit]
 Description=NetBox WSGI Service
-Documentation=https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/
+Documentation=https://docs.netbox.dev/
 After=network-online.target
 Wants=network-online.target
 
@@ -12,8 +12,12 @@ Group=netbox
 PIDFile=/var/tmp/netbox.pid
 WorkingDirectory=/opt/netbox
 
+# Remove the following line if using uWSGI instead of Gunicorn
 ExecStart=/opt/netbox/venv/bin/gunicorn --pid /var/tmp/netbox.pid --pythonpath /opt/netbox/netbox --config /opt/netbox/gunicorn.py netbox.wsgi
 
+# Uncomment the following line if using uWSGI instead of Gunicorn
+#ExecStart=/opt/netbox/venv/bin/uwsgi --ini /opt/netbox/uwsgi.ini
+
 Restart=on-failure
 RestartSec=30
 PrivateTmp=true

contrib/nginx.conf

@@ -14,10 +14,20 @@ server {
     }
 
     location / {
+        # Remove these lines if using uWSGI instead of Gunicorn
         proxy_pass http://127.0.0.1:8001;
         proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Host $http_host;
         proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr;
         proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme;
+
+        # Uncomment these lines if using uWSGI instead of Gunicorn
+        # include uwsgi_params;
+        # uwsgi_pass  127.0.0.1:8001;
+        # uwsgi_param Host $host;
+        # uwsgi_param X-Real-IP $remote_addr;
+        # uwsgi_param X-Forwarded-For $proxy_add_x_forwarded_for;
+        # uwsgi_param X-Forwarded-Proto $http_x_forwarded_proto;
+
     }
 }
 

contrib/uwsgi.ini

@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+[uwsgi]
+; bind to the specified UNIX/TCP socket and port (usually localhost)
+socket = 127.0.0.1:8001
+
+; fail to start if any parameter in the configuration file isn’t explicitly understood by uWSGI.
+strict = true
+
+; re-spawn and pre-fork workers
+master = true
+
+; clear environment on exit
+vacuum = true
+
+; make SIGTERM stop the app (instead of reload)
+die-on-term = true
+
+; exit if no app can be loaded
+need-app = true
+
+; do not use multiple interpreters
+single-interpreter = true
+
+; change to the project directory
+chdir = netbox
+
+; specify the WSGI module to load
+module = netbox.wsgi
+
+; workaround to make uWSGI reloads work with pyuwsgi (not to be used if using uwsgi package instead)
+binary-path = venv/bin/python
+
+; only log internal messages and errors (reverse proxy already logs the requests)
+disable-logging = true
+log-5xx = true

docs/_theme/main.html

@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+{% extends "base.html" %}
+
+{% block site_meta %}
+  {{ super() }}
+  {# Disable search indexing unless we're building for public consumption #}
+  {% if not config.extra.build_public %}
+    <meta name="robots" content="noindex">
+  {% endif %}
+{% endblock %}

docs/_theme/partials/copyright.html

@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<div class="md-copyright">
+  {% if config.copyright %}
+    <div class="md-copyright__highlight">
+      {{ config.copyright }}
+    </div>
+  {% endif %}
+  {% if not config.extra.generator == false %}
+    Made with
+    <a href="https://squidfunk.github.io/mkdocs-material/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">
+      Material for MkDocs
+    </a>
+  {% endif %}
+</div>
+{% if not config.extra.build_public %}
+  <div class="md-copyright">
+    ℹ️ Documentation is being served locally
+  </div>
+{% endif %}

docs/additional-features/journaling.md

@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-# Journaling
-
-All primary objects in NetBox support journaling. A journal is a collection of human-generated notes and comments about an object maintained for historical context. It supplements NetBox's change log to provide additional information about why changes have been made or to convey events which occur outside NetBox. Unlike the change log, in which records typically expire after a configurable period of time, journal entries persist for the life of their associated object.
-
-Each journal entry has a selectable kind (info, success, warning, or danger) and a user-populated `comments` field. Each entry automatically records the date, time, and associated user upon being created.

docs/additional-features/napalm.md

@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-# NAPALM
-
-NetBox supports integration with the [NAPALM automation](https://github.com/napalm-automation/napalm) library. NAPALM allows NetBox to serve a proxy for operational data, fetching live data from network devices and returning it to a requester via its REST API. Note that NetBox does not store any NAPALM data locally.
-
-The NetBox UI will display tabs for status, LLDP neighbors, and configuration under the device view if the following conditions are met:
-
-* Device status is "Active"
-* A primary IP has been assigned to the device
-* A platform with a NAPALM driver has been assigned
-* The authenticated user has the `dcim.napalm_read_device` permission
-
-!!! note
-    To enable this integration, the NAPALM library must be installed. See [installation steps](../../installation/3-netbox/#napalm) for more information.
-
-Below is an example REST API request and response:
-
-```no-highlight
-GET /api/dcim/devices/1/napalm/?method=get_environment
-
-{
-    "get_environment": {
-        ...
-    }
-}
-```
-
-!!! note
-    To make NAPALM requests via the NetBox REST API, a NetBox user must have assigned a permission granting the `napalm_read` action for the device object type.
-
-## Authentication
-
-By default, the [`NAPALM_USERNAME`](../configuration/optional-settings.md#napalm_username) and [`NAPALM_PASSWORD`](../configuration/optional-settings.md#napalm_password) configuration parameters are used for NAPALM authentication. They can be overridden for an individual API call by specifying the `X-NAPALM-Username` and `X-NAPALM-Password` headers.
-
-```
-$ curl "http://localhost/api/dcim/devices/1/napalm/?method=get_environment" \
--H "Authorization: Token $TOKEN" \
--H "Content-Type: application/json" \
--H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
--H "X-NAPALM-Username: foo" \
--H "X-NAPALM-Password: bar"
-```
-
-## Method Support
-
-The list of supported NAPALM methods depends on the [NAPALM driver](https://napalm.readthedocs.io/en/latest/support/index.html#general-support-matrix) configured for the platform of a device. Because there is no granular mechanism in place for limiting potentially disruptive requests, NetBox supports only read-only [get](https://napalm.readthedocs.io/en/latest/support/index.html#getters-support-matrix) methods.
-
-## Multiple Methods
-
-It is possible to request the output of multiple NAPALM methods in a single API request by passing multiple `method` parameters. For example:
-
-```no-highlight
-GET /api/dcim/devices/1/napalm/?method=get_ntp_servers&method=get_ntp_peers
-
-{
-    "get_ntp_servers": {
-        ...
-    },
-    "get_ntp_peers": {
-        ...
-    }
-}
-```
-
-## Optional Arguments
-
-The behavior of NAPALM drivers can be adjusted according to the [optional arguments](https://napalm.readthedocs.io/en/latest/support/index.html#optional-arguments). NetBox exposes those arguments using headers prefixed with `X-NAPALM-`. For example, the SSH port is changed to 2222 in this API call:
-
-```
-$ curl "http://localhost/api/dcim/devices/1/napalm/?method=get_environment" \
--H "Authorization: Token $TOKEN" \
--H "Content-Type: application/json" \
--H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
--H "X-NAPALM-port: 2222"
-```

docs/additional-features/webhooks.md

@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-{!models/extras/webhook.md!}
-
-## Webhook Processing
-
-When a change is detected, any resulting webhooks are placed into a Redis queue for processing. This allows the user's request to complete without needing to wait for the outgoing webhook(s) to be processed. The webhooks are then extracted from the queue by the `rqworker` process and HTTP requests are sent to their respective destinations. The current webhook queue and any failed webhooks can be inspected in the admin UI under System > Background Tasks.
-
-A request is considered successful if the response has a 2XX status code; otherwise, the request is marked as having failed. Failed requests may be retried manually via the admin UI.
-
-## Troubleshooting
-
-To assist with verifying that the content of outgoing webhooks is rendered correctly, NetBox provides a simple HTTP listener that can be run locally to receive and display webhook requests. First, modify the target URL of the desired webhook to `http://localhost:9000/`. This will instruct NetBox to send the request to the local server on TCP port 9000. Then, start the webhook receiver service from the NetBox root directory:
-
-```no-highlight
-$ python netbox/manage.py webhook_receiver
-Listening on port http://localhost:9000. Stop with CONTROL-C.
-```
-
-You can test the receiver itself by sending any HTTP request to it. For example:
-
-```no-highlight
-$ curl -X POST http://localhost:9000 --data '{"foo": "bar"}'
-```
-
-The server will print output similar to the following:
-
-```no-highlight
-[1] Tue, 07 Apr 2020 17:44:02 GMT 127.0.0.1 "POST / HTTP/1.1" 200 -
-Host: localhost:9000
-User-Agent: curl/7.58.0
-Accept: */*
-Content-Length: 14
-Content-Type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded
-
-{"foo": "bar"}
-------------
-```
-
-Note that `webhook_receiver` does not actually _do_ anything with the information received: It merely prints the request headers and body for inspection.
-
-Now, when the NetBox webhook is triggered and processed, you should see its headers and content appear in the terminal where the webhook receiver is listening. If you don't, check that the `rqworker` process is running and that webhook events are being placed into the queue (visible under the NetBox admin UI).

docs/administration/authentication/google.md

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+# Google
+
+This guide explains how to configure single sign-on (SSO) support for NetBox using [Google OAuth2](https://developers.google.com/identity/protocols/oauth2/web-server) as an authentication backend.
+
+## Google OAuth2 Configuration
+
+1. Log into [console.cloud.google.com](https://console.cloud.google.com/).
+2. Create new project for NetBox.
+3. Under "APIs and Services" click "OAuth consent screen" and enter the required information.
+4. Under "Credentials," click "Create Credentials" and select "OAuth 2.0 Client ID." Select type "Web application."
+    - "Authorized JavaScript origins" should follow the format `http[s]://<netbox>[:<port>]`
+    - "Authorized redirect URIs" should follow the format `http[s]://<netbox>[:<port>]/oauth/complete/google-oauth2/`
+5. Copy the "Client ID" and "Client Secret" values somewhere convenient.
+
+!!! note
+    Google requires the NetBox hostname to use a public top-level-domain (e.g. `.com`, `.net`). The use of IP addresses is not permitted (except `127.0.0.1`).
+
+For more information, consult [Google's documentation](https://developers.google.com/identity/protocols/oauth2/web-server#prerequisites).
+
+## NetBox Configuration
+
+### 1. Enter configuration parameters
+
+Enter the following configuration parameters in `configuration.py`, substituting your own values:
+
+```python
+REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'social_core.backends.google.GoogleOAuth2'
+SOCIAL_AUTH_GOOGLE_OAUTH2_KEY = '{CLIENT_ID}'
+SOCIAL_AUTH_GOOGLE_OAUTH2_SECRET = '{CLIENT_SECRET}'
+```
+
+### 2. Restart NetBox
+
+Restart the NetBox services so that the new configuration takes effect. This is typically done with the command below:
+
+```no-highlight
+sudo systemctl restart netbox
+```
+
+## Testing
+
+Log out of NetBox if already authenticated, and click the "Log In" button at top right. You should see the normal login form as well as an option to authenticate using Google. Click that link.
+
+![NetBox Google login form](../../media/authentication/netbox_google_login.png)
+
+You should be redirected to Google's authentication portal. Enter the username/email and password of your test account to continue. You may also be prompted to grant this application access to your account.
+
+![NetBox Google login form](../../media/authentication/google_login_portal.png)
+
+If successful, you will be redirected back to the NetBox UI, and will be logged in as the Google user. You can verify this by navigating to your profile (using the button at top right).
+
+This user account has been replicated locally to NetBox, and can now be assigned groups and permissions.

docs/administration/authentication/microsoft-entra-id.md

@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+# Microsoft Entra ID
+
+This guide explains how to configure single sign-on (SSO) support for NetBox using [Microsoft Entra ID](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/security/business/identity-access/microsoft-entra-id) as an authentication backend.
+
+## Entra ID Configuration
+
+### 1. Create a test user (optional)
+
+Create a new user in AD to be used for testing. You can skip this step if you already have a suitable account created.
+
+### 2. Create an app registration
+
+Under the Azure Active Directory dashboard, navigate to **Add > App registration**.
+
+![Add an app registration](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_add_app_registration.png)
+
+Enter a name for the registration (e.g. "NetBox") and ensure that the "single tenant" option is selected.
+
+Under "Redirect URI", select "Web" for the platform and enter the path to your NetBox installation, ending with `/oauth/complete/azuread-oauth2/`. Note that this URI **must** begin with `https://` unless you are referencing localhost (for development purposes).
+
+![App registration parameters](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_app_registration.png)
+
+Once finished, make note of the application (client) ID; this will be used when configuring NetBox.
+
+![Completed app registration](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_app_registration_created.png)
+
+!!! tip "Multitenant authentication"
+    NetBox also supports multitenant authentication via Azure AD, however it requires a different backend and an additional configuration parameter. Please see the [`python-social-auth` documentation](https://python-social-auth.readthedocs.io/en/latest/backends/azuread.html#tenant-support) for details concerning multitenant authentication.
+
+### 3. Create a secret
+
+When viewing the newly-created app registration, click the "Add a certificate or secret" link under "Client credentials". Under the "Client secrets" tab, click the "New client secret" button.
+
+![Add a client secret](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_add_client_secret.png)
+
+You can optionally specify a description and select a lifetime for the secret.
+
+![Client secret parameters](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_client_secret.png)
+
+Once finished, make note of the secret value (not the secret ID); this will be used when configuring NetBox.
+
+![Client secret parameters](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_client_secret_created.png)
+
+## NetBox Configuration
+
+### 1. Enter configuration parameters
+
+Enter the following configuration parameters in `configuration.py`, substituting your own values:
+
+```python
+REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'social_core.backends.azuread.AzureADOAuth2'
+SOCIAL_AUTH_AZUREAD_OAUTH2_KEY = '{APPLICATION_ID}'
+SOCIAL_AUTH_AZUREAD_OAUTH2_SECRET = '{SECRET_VALUE}'
+```
+
+### 2. Restart NetBox
+
+Restart the NetBox services so that the new configuration takes effect. This is typically done with the command below:
+
+```no-highlight
+sudo systemctl restart netbox
+```
+
+## Testing
+
+Log out of NetBox if already authenticated, and click the "Log In" button at top right. You should see the normal login form as well as an option to authenticate using Azure AD. Click that link.
+
+![NetBox Azure AD login form](../../media/authentication/netbox_azure_ad_login.png)
+
+You should be redirected to Microsoft's authentication portal. Enter the username/email and password of your test account to continue. You may also be prompted to grant this application access to your account.
+
+![NetBox Azure AD login form](../../media/authentication/azure_ad_login_portal.png)
+
+If successful, you will be redirected back to the NetBox UI, and will be logged in as the AD user. You can verify this by navigating to your profile (using the button at top right).
+
+This user account has been replicated locally to NetBox, and can now be assigned groups and permissions.
+
+## Troubleshooting
+
+### Redirect URI does not Match
+
+Azure requires that the authenticating client request a redirect URI that matches what you've configured for the app in step two. This URI **must** begin with `https://` (unless using `localhost` for the domain).
+
+If Azure complains that the requested URI starts with `http://` (not HTTPS), it's likely that your HTTP server is misconfigured or sitting behind a load balancer, so NetBox is not aware that HTTPS is being use. To force the use of an HTTPS redirect URI, set `SOCIAL_AUTH_REDIRECT_IS_HTTPS = True` in `configuration.py` per the [python-social-auth docs](https://python-social-auth.readthedocs.io/en/latest/configuration/settings.html#processing-redirects-and-urlopen).
+
+### Not Logged in After Authenticating
+
+If you are redirected to the NetBox UI after authenticating successfully, but are _not_ logged in, double-check the configured backend and app registration. The instructions in this guide pertain only to the `azuread.AzureADOAuth2` backend using a single-tenant app registration.

docs/administration/authentication/okta.md

@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+# Okta
+
+This guide explains how to configure single sign-on (SSO) support for NetBox using [Okta](https://www.okta.com/) as an authentication backend.
+
+## Okta Configuration
+
+!!! tip "Okta developer account"
+    Okta offers free developer accounts at <https://developer.okta.com/>.
+
+### 1. Create a test user (optional)
+
+Create a new user in the Okta admin portal to be used for testing. You can skip this step if you already have a suitable account created.
+
+### 2. Create an app registration
+
+Within the Okta administration dashboard, navigate to  **Applications > Applications**, and click the "Create App Integration" button. Select "OIDC" as the sign-in method, and "Web application" for the application type.
+
+![Create an app registration](../../media/authentication/okta_create_app_registration.png)
+
+On the next page, give the app integration a name (e.g. "NetBox") and specify the sign-in and sign-out URIs. These URIs should follow the formats below:
+
+* Sign-in URI: `https://{netbox}/oauth/complete/okta-openidconnect/`
+* Sign-out URI: `https://{netbox}/oauth/disconnect/okta-openidconnect/`
+
+![Web app integration](../../media/authentication/okta_web_app_integration.png)
+
+Under "Assignments," select the controlled access setting most appropriate for your organization. Click "Save" to complete the creation.
+
+Once finished, note the following parameters. These will be used to configured NetBox.
+
+* Client ID
+* Client secret
+* Okta domain
+
+![Okta integration parameters](../../media/authentication/okta_integration_parameters.png)
+
+## NetBox Configuration
+
+### 1. Enter configuration parameters
+
+Enter the following configuration parameters in `configuration.py`, substituting your own values:
+
+```python
+REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'social_core.backends.okta_openidconnect.OktaOpenIdConnect'
+SOCIAL_AUTH_OKTA_OPENIDCONNECT_KEY = '{Client ID}'
+SOCIAL_AUTH_OKTA_OPENIDCONNECT_SECRET = '{Client secret}'
+SOCIAL_AUTH_OKTA_OPENIDCONNECT_API_URL = 'https://{Okta domain}/oauth2/'
+```
+
+### 2. Restart NetBox
+
+Restart the NetBox services so that the new configuration takes effect. This is typically done with the command below:
+
+```no-highlight
+sudo systemctl restart netbox
+```
+
+## Testing
+
+Log out of NetBox if already authenticated, and click the "Log In" button at top right. You should see the normal login form as well as an option to authenticate using Okta. Click that link.
+
+![NetBox Okta login form](../../media/authentication/netbox_okta_login.png)
+
+You should be redirected to Okta's authentication portal. Enter the username/email and password of your test account to continue. You may also be prompted to grant this application access to your account.
+
+![Okta login portal](../../media/authentication/okta_login_portal.png)
+
+If successful, you will be redirected back to the NetBox UI, and will be logged in as the Okta user. You can verify this by navigating to your profile (using the button at top right).
+
+This user account has been replicated locally to NetBox, and can now be assigned groups and permissions.

docs/administration/authentication/overview.md

@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+# Authentication
+
+## Local Authentication
+
+Local user accounts and groups can be created in NetBox under the "Authentication" section in the "Admin" menu. This section is available only to users with the "staff" permission enabled.
+
+At a minimum, each user account must have a username and password set. User accounts may also denote a first name, last name, and email address. [Permissions](../permissions.md) may also be assigned to individual users and/or groups as needed.
+
+## Remote Authentication
+
+NetBox may be configured to provide user authenticate via a remote backend in addition to local authentication. This is done by setting the `REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND` configuration parameter to a suitable backend class. NetBox provides several options for remote authentication.
+
+### LDAP Authentication
+
+```python
+REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'netbox.authentication.LDAPBackend'
+```
+
+NetBox includes an authentication backend which supports LDAP. See the [LDAP installation docs](../../installation/6-ldap.md) for more detail about this backend.
+
+### HTTP Header Authentication
+
+```python
+REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'netbox.authentication.RemoteUserBackend'
+```
+
+Another option for remote authentication in NetBox is to enable HTTP header-based user assignment. The front end HTTP server (e.g. nginx or Apache) performs client authentication as a process external to NetBox, and passes information about the authenticated user via HTTP headers. By default, the user is assigned via the `REMOTE_USER` header, but this can be customized via the `REMOTE_AUTH_HEADER` configuration parameter.
+
+Optionally, user profile information can be supplied by `REMOTE_USER_FIRST_NAME`, `REMOTE_USER_LAST_NAME` and `REMOTE_USER_EMAIL` headers. These are saved to the user's profile during the authentication process. These headers can be customized like the `REMOTE_USER` header.
+
+!!! warning Verify Header Compatibility
+    Some WSGI servers may drop headers which contain unsupported characters. For instance, gunicorn v22.0 and later silently drops HTTP headers containing underscores. This behavior can be disabled by changing gunicorn's [`header_map`](https://docs.gunicorn.org/en/stable/settings.html#header-map) setting to `dangerous`.
+
+### Single Sign-On (SSO)
+
+```python
+REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND = 'social_core.backends.google.GoogleOAuth2'
+```
+
+NetBox supports single sign-on authentication via the [python-social-auth](https://github.com/python-social-auth) library. To enable SSO, specify the path to the desired authentication backend within the `social_core` Python package. Please see the complete list of [supported authentication backends](https://github.com/python-social-auth/social-core/tree/master/social_core/backends) for the available options.
+
+Most remote authentication backends require some additional configuration through settings prefixed with `SOCIAL_AUTH_`. These will be automatically imported from NetBox's `configuration.py` file. Additionally, the [authentication pipeline](https://python-social-auth.readthedocs.io/en/latest/pipeline.html) can be customized via the `SOCIAL_AUTH_PIPELINE` parameter. (NetBox's default pipeline is defined in `netbox/settings.py` for your reference.)
+
+#### Configuring the SSO module's appearance
+
+The way a remote authentication backend is displayed to the user on the login
+page may be adjusted via the `SOCIAL_AUTH_BACKEND_ATTRS` parameter, defaulting
+to an empty dictionary. This dictionary maps a `social_core` module's name (ie.
+`REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND.name`) to a couple of parameters, `(display_name, icon)`.
+
+The `display_name` is the name displayed to the user on the login page. The
+icon may either be the URL of an icon; refer to a [Material Design
+Icons](https://github.com/google/material-design-icons) icon's name; or be
+`None` for no icon.
+
+For instance, the OIDC backend may be customized with
+```python
+SOCIAL_AUTH_BACKEND_ATTRS = {
+    'oidc': ("My awesome SSO", "login"),
+}
+```

docs/administration/error-reporting.md

@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+# Error Reporting
+
+## Sentry
+
+### Enabling Error Reporting
+
+NetBox supports native integration with [Sentry](https://sentry.io/) for automatic error reporting. To enable this functionality, set `SENTRY_ENABLED` to True and define your unique [data source name (DSN)](https://docs.sentry.io/product/sentry-basics/concepts/dsn-explainer/) in `configuration.py`.
+
+```python
+SENTRY_ENABLED = True
+SENTRY_DSN = "https://examplePublicKey@o0.ingest.sentry.io/0"
+```
+
+Setting `SENTRY_ENABLED` to False will disable the Sentry integration.
+
+### Assigning Tags
+
+You can optionally attach one or more arbitrary tags to the outgoing error reports if desired by setting the `SENTRY_TAGS` parameter:
+
+```python
+SENTRY_TAGS = {
+    "custom.foo": "123",
+    "custom.bar": "abc",
+}
+```
+
+!!! warning "Reserved tag prefixes"
+    Avoid using any tag names which begin with `netbox.`, as this prefix is reserved by the NetBox application.
+
+### Testing
+
+Once the configuration has been saved, restart the NetBox service.
+
+To test Sentry operation, try generating a 404 (page not found) error by navigating to an invalid URL, such as `https://netbox/404-error-testing`. (Be sure that debug mode has been disabled.) After receiving a 404 response from the NetBox server, you should see the issue appear shortly in Sentry.

docs/administration/housekeeping.md

@@ -3,15 +3,47 @@
 NetBox includes a `housekeeping` management command that should be run nightly. This command handles:
 
 * Clearing expired authentication sessions from the database
-* Deleting changelog records older than the configured [retention time](../configuration/optional-settings.md#changelog_retention)
+* Deleting changelog records older than the configured [retention time](../configuration/miscellaneous.md#changelog_retention)
+* Deleting job result records older than the configured [retention time](../configuration/miscellaneous.md#job_retention)
+* Check for new NetBox releases (if [`RELEASE_CHECK_URL`](../configuration/miscellaneous.md#release_check_url) is set)
 
-This command can be invoked directly, or by using the shell script provided at `/opt/netbox/contrib/netbox-housekeeping.sh`. This script can be linked from your cron scheduler's daily jobs directory (e.g. `/etc/cron.daily`) or referenced directly within the cron configuration file.
+This command can be invoked directly, or by using the shell script provided at `/opt/netbox/contrib/netbox-housekeeping.sh`.
+
+## Scheduling
+
+### Using Cron
+
+This script can be linked from your cron scheduler's daily jobs directory (e.g. `/etc/cron.daily`) or referenced directly within the cron configuration file.
 
 ```shell
-ln -s /opt/netbox/contrib/netbox-housekeeping.sh /etc/cron.daily/netbox-housekeeping
+sudo ln -s /opt/netbox/contrib/netbox-housekeeping.sh /etc/cron.daily/netbox-housekeeping
 ```
 
 !!! note
     On Debian-based systems, be sure to omit the `.sh` file extension when linking to the script from within a cron directory. Otherwise, the task may not run.
 
-The `housekeeping` command can also be run manually at any time: Running the command outside scheduled execution times will not interfere with its operation.
+### Using Systemd
+
+First, create symbolic links for the systemd service and timer files. Link the existing service and timer files from the `/opt/netbox/contrib/` directory to the `/etc/systemd/system/` directory:
+
+```bash
+sudo ln -s /opt/netbox/contrib/netbox-housekeeping.service /etc/systemd/system/netbox-housekeeping.service
+sudo ln -s /opt/netbox/contrib/netbox-housekeeping.timer /etc/systemd/system/netbox-housekeeping.timer
+```
+
+Then, reload the systemd configuration and enable the timer to start automatically at boot:
+
+```bash
+sudo systemctl daemon-reload
+sudo systemctl enable --now netbox-housekeeping.timer
+```
+
+Check the status of your timer by running:
+
+```bash
+sudo systemctl list-timers --all
+```
+
+This command will show a list of all timers, including your `netbox-housekeeping.timer`. Make sure the timer is active and properly scheduled.
+
+That's it! Your NetBox housekeeping service is now configured to run daily using systemd.

docs/administration/netbox-shell.md

@@ -153,15 +153,10 @@ New objects can be created by instantiating the desired model, defining values f
 ```
 >>> lab1 = Site.objects.get(pk=7)
 >>> myvlan = VLAN(vid=123, name='MyNewVLAN', site=lab1)
+>>> myvlan.full_clean()
 >>> myvlan.save()
 ```
 
-Alternatively, the above can be performed as a single operation. (Note, however, that `save()` does _not_ return the new instance for reuse.)
-
-```
->>> VLAN(vid=123, name='MyNewVLAN', site=Site.objects.get(pk=7)).save()
-```
-
 To modify an existing object, we retrieve it, update the desired field(s), and call `save()` again.
 
 ```
@@ -169,6 +164,7 @@ To modify an existing object, we retrieve it, update the desired field(s), and c
 >>> vlan.name
 'MyNewVLAN'
 >>> vlan.name = 'BetterName'
+>>> vlan.full_clean()
 >>> vlan.save()
 >>> VLAN.objects.get(pk=1280).name
 'BetterName'

docs/administration/permissions.md

@@ -1,8 +1,76 @@
-# Permissions
+# Object-Based Permissions
 
-NetBox v2.9 introduced a new object-based permissions framework, which replace's Django's built-in permissions model. Object-based permissions enable an administrator to grant users or groups the ability to perform an action on arbitrary subsets of objects in NetBox, rather than all objects of a certain type. For example, it is possible to grant a user permission to view only sites within a particular region, or to modify only VLANs with a numeric ID within a certain range.
+NetBox employs a new object-based permissions framework, which replaces Django's built-in permissions model. Object-based permissions enable an administrator to grant users or groups the ability to perform an action on arbitrary subsets of objects in NetBox, rather than all objects of a certain type. For example, it is possible to grant a user permission to view only sites within a particular region, or to modify only VLANs with a numeric ID within a certain range.
 
-{!models/users/objectpermission.md!}
+A permission in NetBox represents a relationship shared by several components:
+
+* Object type(s) - One or more types of object in NetBox
+* User(s)/Group(s) - One or more users or groups of users
+* Action(s) - The action(s) that can be performed on an object
+* Constraints - An arbitrary filter used to limit the granted action(s) to a specific subset of objects
+
+At a minimum, a permission assignment must specify one object type, one user or group, and one action. The specification of constraints is optional: A permission without any constraints specified will apply to all instances of the selected model(s).
+
+## Actions
+
+There are four core actions that can be permitted for each type of object within NetBox, roughly analogous to the CRUD convention (create, read, update, and delete):
+
+* **View** - Retrieve an object from the database
+* **Add** - Create a new object
+* **Change** - Modify an existing object
+* **Delete** - Delete an existing object
+
+In addition to these, permissions can also grant custom actions that may be required by a specific model or plugin. For example, the `run` permission for scripts allows a user to execute custom scripts. These can be specified when granting a permission in the "additional actions" field.
+
+!!! note
+    Internally, all actions granted by a permission (both built-in and custom) are stored as strings in an array field named `actions`.
+
+## Constraints
+
+Constraints are expressed as a JSON object or list representing a [Django query filter](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/models/querysets/#field-lookups). This is the same syntax that you would pass to the QuerySet `filter()` method when performing a query using the Django ORM. As with query filters, double underscores can be used to traverse related objects or invoke lookup expressions. Some example queries and their corresponding definitions are shown below.
+
+All attributes defined within a single JSON object are applied with a logical AND. For example, suppose you assign a permission for the site model with the following constraints.
+
+```json
+{
+  "status": "active",
+  "region__name": "Americas"
+}
+```
+
+The permission will grant access only to sites which have a status of "active" **and** which are assigned to the "Americas" region.
+
+To achieve a logical OR with a different set of constraints, define multiple objects within a list. For example, if you want to constrain the permission to VLANs with an ID between 100 and 199 _or_ a status of "reserved," do the following:
+
+```json
+[
+  {
+    "vid__gte": 100,
+    "vid__lt": 200
+  },
+  {
+    "status": "reserved"
+  }
+]
+```
+
+Additionally, where multiple permissions have been assigned for an object type, their collective constraints will be merged using a logical "OR" operation.
+
+### User Token
+
+When defining a permission constraint, administrators may use the special token `$user` to reference the current user at the time of evaluation. This can be helpful to restrict users to editing only their own journal entries, for example. Such a constraint might be defined as:
+
+```json
+{
+  "created_by": "$user"
+}
+```
+
+The `$user` token can be used only as a constraint value, or as an item within a list of values. It cannot be modified or extended to reference specific user attributes.
+
+### Default Permissions
+
+While permissions are typically assigned to specific groups and/or users, it is also possible to define a set of default permissions that are applied to _all_ authenticated users. This is done using the [`DEFAULT_PERMISSIONS`](../configuration/security.md#default_permissions) configuration parameter. Note that statically configuring permissions for specific users or groups is **not** supported.
 
 ### Example Constraint Definitions
 

docs/administration/replicating-netbox.md

@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ pg_dump --username netbox --password --host localhost -s netbox > netbox_schema.
 By default, NetBox stores uploaded files (such as image attachments) in its media directory. To fully replicate an instance of NetBox, you'll need to copy both the database and the media files.
 
 !!! note
-    These operations are not necessary if your installation is utilizing a [remote storage backend](../../configuration/optional-settings/#storage_backend).
+    These operations are not necessary if your installation is utilizing a [remote storage backend](../configuration/system.md#storage_backend).
 
 ### Archive the Media Directory
 

docs/configuration/data-validation.md

@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+# Data & Validation Parameters
+
+## CUSTOM_VALIDATORS
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+This is a mapping of models to [custom validators](../customization/custom-validation.md) that have been defined locally to enforce custom validation logic. An example is provided below:
+
+```python
+CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
+    "dcim.site": [
+        {
+            "name": {
+                "min_length": 5,
+                "max_length": 30
+            }
+        },
+        "my_plugin.validators.Validator1"
+    ],
+    "dim.device": [
+        "my_plugin.validators.Validator1"
+    ]
+}
+```
+
+---
+
+## FIELD_CHOICES
+
+Some static choice fields on models can be configured with custom values. This is done by defining `FIELD_CHOICES` as a dictionary mapping model fields to their choices. Each choice in the list must have a database value and a human-friendly label, and may optionally specify a color. (A list of available colors is provided below.)
+
+The choices provided can either replace the stock choices provided by NetBox, or append to them. To _replace_ the available choices, specify the app, model, and field name separated by dots. For example, the site model would be referenced as `dcim.Site.status`. To _extend_ the available choices, append a plus sign to the end of this string (e.g. `dcim.Site.status+`).
+
+For example, the following configuration would replace the default site status choices with the options Foo, Bar, and Baz:
+
+```python
+FIELD_CHOICES = {
+    'dcim.Site.status': (
+        ('foo', 'Foo', 'red'),
+        ('bar', 'Bar', 'green'),
+        ('baz', 'Baz', 'blue'),
+    )
+}
+```
+
+Appending a plus sign to the field identifier would instead _add_ these choices to the ones already offered:
+
+```python
+FIELD_CHOICES = {
+    'dcim.Site.status+': (
+        ...
+    )
+}
+```
+
+The following model fields support configurable choices:
+
+* `circuits.Circuit.status`
+* `dcim.Device.status`
+* `dcim.Location.status`
+* `dcim.Module.status`
+* `dcim.PowerFeed.status`
+* `dcim.Rack.status`
+* `dcim.Site.status`
+* `dcim.VirtualDeviceContext.status`
+* `extras.JournalEntry.kind`
+* `ipam.IPAddress.status`
+* `ipam.IPRange.status`
+* `ipam.Prefix.status`
+* `ipam.VLAN.status`
+* `virtualization.Cluster.status`
+* `virtualization.VirtualMachine.status`
+* `wireless.WirelessLAN.status`
+
+The following colors are supported:
+
+* `blue`
+* `indigo`
+* `purple`
+* `pink`
+* `red`
+* `orange`
+* `yellow`
+* `green`
+* `teal`
+* `cyan`
+* `gray`
+* `black`
+* `white`
+
+---
+
+## PROTECTION_RULES
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+This is a mapping of models to [custom validators](../customization/custom-validation.md) against which an object is evaluated immediately prior to its deletion. If validation fails, the object is not deleted. An example is provided below:
+
+```python
+PROTECTION_RULES = {
+    "dcim.site": [
+        {
+            "status": {
+                "eq": "decommissioning"
+            }
+        },
+        "my_plugin.validators.Validator1",
+    ]
+}
+```

docs/configuration/default-values.md

@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+# Default Value Parameters
+
+## DEFAULT_DASHBOARD
+
+This parameter controls the content and layout of user's default dashboard. Once the dashboard has been created, the user is free to customize it as they please by adding, removing, and reconfiguring widgets.
+
+This parameter must specify an iterable of dictionaries, each representing a discrete dashboard widget and its configuration. The follow widget attributes are supported:
+
+* `widget`: Dotted path to the Python class (required)
+* `width`: Default widget width (between 1 and 12, inclusive)
+* `height`: Default widget height, in rows
+* `title`: Widget title
+* `color`: Color of the widget's title bar, specified by name
+* `config`: Dictionary mapping of any widget configuration parameters
+
+A brief example configuration is provided below.
+
+```python
+DEFAULT_DASHBOARD = [
+    {
+        'widget': 'extras.ObjectCountsWidget',
+        'width': 4,
+        'height': 3,
+        'title': 'Organization',
+        'config': {
+            'models': [
+                'dcim.site',
+                'tenancy.tenant',
+                'tenancy.contact',
+            ]
+        }
+    },
+    {
+        'widget': 'extras.ObjectCountsWidget',
+        'width': 4,
+        'height': 3,
+        'title': 'IPAM',
+        'color': 'blue',
+        'config': {
+            'models': [
+                'ipam.prefix',
+                'ipam.iprange',
+                'ipam.ipaddress',
+            ]
+        }
+    },
+]
+```
+
+## DEFAULT_USER_PREFERENCES
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+This is a dictionary defining the default preferences to be set for newly-created user accounts. For example, to set the default page size for all users to 100, define the following:
+
+```python
+DEFAULT_USER_PREFERENCES = {
+    "pagination": {
+        "per_page": 100
+    }
+}
+```
+
+For a complete list of available preferences, log into NetBox and navigate to `/user/preferences/`. A period in a preference name indicates a level of nesting in the JSON data. The example above maps to `pagination.per_page`.
+
+---
+
+## PAGINATE_COUNT
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: 50
+
+The default maximum number of objects to display per page within each list of objects.
+
+---
+
+## POWERFEED_DEFAULT_AMPERAGE
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: 15
+
+The default value for the `amperage` field when creating new power feeds.
+
+---
+
+## POWERFEED_DEFAULT_MAX_UTILIZATION
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: 80
+
+The default value (percentage) for the `max_utilization` field when creating new power feeds.
+
+---
+
+## POWERFEED_DEFAULT_VOLTAGE
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: 120
+
+The default value for the `voltage` field when creating new power feeds.
+
+---
+
+## RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_HEIGHT
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: 22
+
+Default height (in pixels) of a unit within a rack elevation. For best results, this should be approximately one tenth of `RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_WIDTH`.
+
+---
+
+## RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_WIDTH
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: 220
+
+Default width (in pixels) of a unit within a rack elevation.

docs/configuration/development.md

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+# Development Parameters
+
+## DEBUG
+
+Default: False
+
+This setting enables debugging. Debugging should be enabled only during development or troubleshooting. Note that only
+clients which access NetBox from a recognized [internal IP address](./system.md#internal_ips) will see debugging tools in the user
+interface.
+
+!!! warning
+    Never enable debugging on a production system, as it can expose sensitive data to unauthenticated users and impose a
+    substantial performance penalty.
+
+---
+
+## DEVELOPER
+
+Default: False
+
+This parameter serves as a safeguard to prevent some potentially dangerous behavior, such as generating new database schema migrations. Additionally, enabling this setting disables the debug warning banner in the UI. Set this to `True` **only** if you are actively developing the NetBox code base.

docs/configuration/error-reporting.md

@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+# Error Reporting Settings
+
+## SENTRY_DSN
+
+Default: None
+
+Defines a Sentry data source name (DSN) for automated error reporting. `SENTRY_ENABLED` must be True for this parameter to take effect. For example:
+
+```
+SENTRY_DSN = "https://examplePublicKey@o0.ingest.sentry.io/0"
+```
+
+---
+
+## SENTRY_ENABLED
+
+Default: False
+
+Set to True to enable automatic error reporting via [Sentry](https://sentry.io/).
+
+!!! note
+    The `sentry-sdk` Python package is required to enable Sentry integration.
+
+---
+
+## SENTRY_SAMPLE_RATE
+
+Default: 1.0 (all)
+
+The sampling rate for errors. Must be a value between 0 (disabled) and 1.0 (report on all errors).
+
+---
+
+## SENTRY_SEND_DEFAULT_PII
+
+Default: False
+
+Maps to the Sentry SDK's [`send_default_pii`](https://docs.sentry.io/platforms/python/configuration/options/#send-default-pii) parameter. If enabled, certain personally identifiable information (PII) is added.
+
+!!! warning "Sensitive data"
+    If you enable this option, be aware that sensitive data such as cookies and authentication tokens will be logged.
+
+---
+
+## SENTRY_TAGS
+
+An optional dictionary of tag names and values to apply to Sentry error reports.For example:
+
+```
+SENTRY_TAGS = {
+    "custom.foo": "123",
+    "custom.bar": "abc",
+}
+```
+
+!!! warning "Reserved tag prefixes"
+    Avoid using any tag names which begin with `netbox.`, as this prefix is reserved by the NetBox application.
+
+---
+
+## SENTRY_TRACES_SAMPLE_RATE
+
+Default: 0 (disabled)
+
+The sampling rate for transactions. Must be a value between 0 (disabled) and 1.0 (report on all transactions).
+
+!!! warning "Consider performance implications"
+    A high sampling rate for transactions can induce significant performance penalties. If transaction reporting is desired, it is recommended to use a relatively low sample rate of 10% to 20% (0.1 to 0.2).

docs/configuration/graphql-api.md

@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+# GraphQL API Parameters
+
+## GRAPHQL_ENABLED
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: True
+
+Setting this to False will disable the GraphQL API.
+
+---
+
+## GRAPHQL_MAX_ALIASES
+
+Default: 10
+
+The maximum number of queries that a GraphQL API request may contain.

docs/configuration/index.md

@@ -1,18 +1,49 @@
 # NetBox Configuration
 
-NetBox's local configuration is stored in `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/netbox/configuration.py`. An example configuration is provided as `configuration.example.py`. You may copy or rename the example configuration and make changes as appropriate. NetBox will not run without a configuration file.
+## Configuration File
 
-While NetBox has many configuration settings, only a few of them must be defined at the time of installation.
+NetBox's configuration file contains all the important parameters which control how NetBox functions: database settings, security controls, user preferences, and so on. While the default configuration suffices out of the box for most use cases, there are a few [required parameters](./required-parameters.md) which **must** be defined during installation. 
 
-## Configuration Parameters
+The configuration file is loaded from `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/netbox/configuration.py` by default. An example configuration is provided at `configuration_example.py`, which you may copy to use as your default config. Note that a configuration file must be defined; NetBox will not run without one.
 
-* [Required settings](required-settings.md)
-* [Optional settings](optional-settings.md)
+!!! info "Customizing the Configuration Module"
+    A custom configuration module may be specified by setting the `NETBOX_CONFIGURATION` environment variable. This must be a dotted path to the desired Python module. For example, a file named `my_config.py` in the same directory as `settings.py` would be referenced as `netbox.my_config`.
 
-## Changing the Configuration
+    To keep things simple, the NetBox documentation refers to the configuration file simply as `configuration.py`.
 
-Configuration settings may be changed at any time. However, the WSGI service (e.g. Gunicorn) must be restarted before the changes will take effect:
+Some configuration parameters may alternatively be defined either in `configuration.py` or within the administrative section of the user interface. Settings which are "hard-coded" in the configuration file take precedence over those defined via the UI.
+
+## Dynamic Configuration Parameters
+
+Some configuration parameters are primarily controlled via NetBox's admin interface (under Admin > Extras > Configuration Revisions). These are noted where applicable in the documentation. These settings may also be overridden in `configuration.py` to prevent them from being modified via the UI. A complete list of supported parameters is provided below:
+
+* [`ALLOWED_URL_SCHEMES`](./security.md#allowed_url_schemes)
+* [`BANNER_BOTTOM`](./miscellaneous.md#banner_bottom)
+* [`BANNER_LOGIN`](./miscellaneous.md#banner_login)
+* [`BANNER_TOP`](./miscellaneous.md#banner_top)
+* [`CHANGELOG_RETENTION`](./miscellaneous.md#changelog_retention)
+* [`CUSTOM_VALIDATORS`](./data-validation.md#custom_validators)
+* [`DEFAULT_USER_PREFERENCES`](./default-values.md#default_user_preferences)
+* [`ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE`](./miscellaneous.md#enforce_global_unique)
+* [`GRAPHQL_ENABLED`](./graphql-api.md#graphql_enabled)
+* [`JOB_RETENTION`](./miscellaneous.md#job_retention)
+* [`MAINTENANCE_MODE`](./miscellaneous.md#maintenance_mode)
+* [`MAPS_URL`](./miscellaneous.md#maps_url)
+* [`MAX_PAGE_SIZE`](./miscellaneous.md#max_page_size)
+* [`PAGINATE_COUNT`](./default-values.md#paginate_count)
+* [`POWERFEED_DEFAULT_AMPERAGE`](./default-values.md#powerfeed_default_amperage)
+* [`POWERFEED_DEFAULT_MAX_UTILIZATION`](./default-values.md#powerfeed_default_max_utilization)
+* [`POWERFEED_DEFAULT_VOLTAGE`](./default-values.md#powerfeed_default_voltage)
+* [`PREFER_IPV4`](./miscellaneous.md#prefer_ipv4)
+* [`RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_HEIGHT`](./default-values.md#rack_elevation_default_unit_height)
+* [`RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_WIDTH`](./default-values.md#rack_elevation_default_unit_width)
+
+## Modifying the Configuration
+
+The configuration file may be modified at any time. However, the WSGI service (e.g. Gunicorn) must be restarted before these changes will take effect:
 
 ```no-highlight
 $ sudo systemctl restart netbox
 ```
+
+Dynamic configuration parameters (those which can be modified via the UI) take effect immediately.

docs/configuration/miscellaneous.md

@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+# Miscellaneous Parameters
+
+## ADMINS
+
+NetBox will email details about critical errors to the administrators listed here. This should be a list of (name, email) tuples. For example:
+
+```python
+ADMINS = [
+    ['Hank Hill', 'hhill@example.com'],
+    ['Dale Gribble', 'dgribble@example.com'],
+]
+```
+
+---
+
+## BANNER_BOTTOM
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Sets content for the bottom banner in the user interface.
+
+---
+
+## BANNER_LOGIN
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+This defines custom content to be displayed on the login page above the login form. HTML is allowed.
+
+---
+
+## BANNER_MAINTENANCE
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+This adds a banner to the top of every page when maintenance mode is enabled. HTML is allowed.
+
+---
+
+## BANNER_TOP
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Sets content for the top banner in the user interface.
+
+!!! tip
+    If you'd like the top and bottom banners to match, set the following:
+    
+    ```python
+    BANNER_TOP = 'Your banner text'
+    BANNER_BOTTOM = BANNER_TOP
+    ```
+
+---
+
+## CENSUS_REPORTING_ENABLED
+
+Default: True
+
+Enables anonymous census reporting. To opt out of census reporting, set this to False.
+
+This data enables the project maintainers to estimate how many NetBox deployments exist and track the adoption of new versions over time. Census reporting effects a single HTTP request each time a worker starts. The only data reported by this function are the NetBox version, Python version, and a pseudorandom unique identifier.
+
+---
+
+## CHANGELOG_RETENTION
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: 90
+
+The number of days to retain logged changes (object creations, updates, and deletions). Set this to `0` to retain
+changes in the database indefinitely.
+
+!!! warning
+    If enabling indefinite changelog retention, it is recommended to periodically delete old entries. Otherwise, the database may eventually exceed capacity.
+
+---
+
+## CHANGELOG_SKIP_EMPTY_CHANGES
+
+Default: True
+
+If enabled, a change log record will not be created when an object is updated without any changes to its existing field values.
+
+!!! note
+    The object's `last_updated` field will always reflect the time of the most recent update, regardless of this parameter.
+
+---
+
+## DATA_UPLOAD_MAX_MEMORY_SIZE
+
+Default: `2621440` (2.5 MB)
+
+The maximum size (in bytes) of an incoming HTTP request (i.e. `GET` or `POST` data). Requests which exceed this size will raise a `RequestDataTooBig` exception.
+
+---
+
+## ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: True
+
+By default, NetBox will prevent the creation of duplicate prefixes and IP addresses in the global table (that is, those which are not assigned to any VRF). This validation can be disabled by setting `ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE` to False.
+
+---
+
+## EVENTS_PIPELINE
+
+!!! info "This parameter was introduced in NetBox v4.2."
+
+Default: `['extras.events.process_event_queue',]`
+
+NetBox will call dotted paths to the functions listed here for events (create, update, delete) on models as well as when custom EventRules are fired.
+
+---
+
+## FILE_UPLOAD_MAX_MEMORY_SIZE
+
+Default: `2621440` (2.5 MB)
+
+The maximum amount (in bytes) of uploaded data that will be held in memory before being written to the filesystem. Changing this setting can be useful for example to be able to upload files bigger than 2.5MB to custom scripts for processing.
+
+---
+
+## JOB_RETENTION
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: 90
+
+The number of days to retain job results (scripts and reports). Set this to `0` to retain job results in the database indefinitely.
+
+!!! warning
+    If enabling indefinite job results retention, it is recommended to periodically delete old entries. Otherwise, the database may eventually exceed capacity.
+
+---
+
+## MAINTENANCE_MODE
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: False
+
+Setting this to True will display a "maintenance mode" banner at the top of every page. Additionally, NetBox will no longer update a user's "last active" time upon login. This is to allow new logins when the database is in a read-only state. Recording of login times will resume when maintenance mode is disabled.
+
+---
+
+## MAPS_URL
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: `https://maps.google.com/?q=` (Google Maps)
+
+This specifies the URL to use when presenting a map of a physical location by street address or GPS coordinates. The URL must accept either a free-form street address or a comma-separated pair of numeric coordinates appended to it. Set this to `None` to disable the "map it" button within the UI.
+
+---
+
+## MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: 1000
+
+A web user or API consumer can request an arbitrary number of objects by appending the "limit" parameter to the URL (e.g. `?limit=1000`). This parameter defines the maximum acceptable limit. Setting this to `0` or `None` will allow a client to retrieve _all_ matching objects at once with no limit by specifying `?limit=0`.
+
+---
+
+## METRICS_ENABLED
+
+Default: False
+
+Toggle the availability Prometheus-compatible metrics at `/metrics`. See the [Prometheus Metrics](../integrations/prometheus-metrics.md) documentation for more details.
+
+---
+
+## PREFER_IPV4
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: False
+
+When determining the primary IP address for a device, IPv6 is preferred over IPv4 by default. Set this to True to prefer IPv4 instead.
+
+---
+
+## QUEUE_MAPPINGS
+
+Allows changing which queues are used internally for background tasks.
+
+```python
+QUEUE_MAPPINGS = {
+    'webhook': 'low',
+    'report': 'high',
+    'script': 'high',
+}
+```
+
+If no queue is defined the queue named `default` will be used.
+
+---
+
+## RELEASE_CHECK_URL
+
+Default: None (disabled)
+
+This parameter defines the URL of the repository that will be checked for new NetBox releases. When a new release is detected, a message will be displayed to administrative users on the home page. This can be set to the official repository (`'https://api.github.com/repos/netbox-community/netbox/releases'`) or a custom fork. Set this to `None` to disable automatic update checks.
+
+!!! note
+    The URL provided **must** be compatible with the [GitHub REST API](https://docs.github.com/en/rest).
+
+---
+
+## RQ_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT
+
+Default: `300`
+
+The maximum execution time of a background task (such as running a custom script), in seconds.
+
+---
+
+## RQ_RETRY_INTERVAL
+
+Default: `60`
+
+This parameter controls how frequently a failed job is retried, up to the maximum number of times specified by `RQ_RETRY_MAX`. This must be either an integer specifying the number of seconds to wait between successive attempts, or a list of such values. For example, `[60, 300, 3600]` will retry the task after 1 minute, 5 minutes, and 1 hour.
+
+---
+
+## RQ_RETRY_MAX
+
+Default: `0` (retries disabled)
+
+The maximum number of times a background task will be retried before being marked as failed.

docs/configuration/optional-settings.md

@@ -1,647 +0,0 @@
-# Optional Configuration Settings
-
-## ADMINS
-
-NetBox will email details about critical errors to the administrators listed here. This should be a list of (name, email) tuples. For example:
-
-```python
-ADMINS = [
-    ['Hank Hill', 'hhill@example.com'],
-    ['Dale Gribble', 'dgribble@example.com'],
-]
-```
-
----
-
-## ALLOWED_URL_SCHEMES
-
-Default: `('file', 'ftp', 'ftps', 'http', 'https', 'irc', 'mailto', 'sftp', 'ssh', 'tel', 'telnet', 'tftp', 'vnc', 'xmpp')`
-
-A list of permitted URL schemes referenced when rendering links within NetBox. Note that only the schemes specified in this list will be accepted: If adding your own, be sure to replicate all of the default values as well (excluding those schemes which are not desirable).
-
----
-
-## BANNER_TOP
-
-## BANNER_BOTTOM
-
-Setting these variables will display custom content in a banner at the top and/or bottom of the page, respectively. HTML is allowed. To replicate the content of the top banner in the bottom banner, set:
-
-```python
-BANNER_TOP = 'Your banner text'
-BANNER_BOTTOM = BANNER_TOP
-```
-
----
-
-## BANNER_LOGIN
-
-This defines custom content to be displayed on the login page above the login form. HTML is allowed.
-
----
-
-## BASE_PATH
-
-Default: None
-
-The base URL path to use when accessing NetBox. Do not include the scheme or domain name. For example, if installed at https://example.com/netbox/, set:
-
-```python
-BASE_PATH = 'netbox/'
-```
-
----
-
-## CHANGELOG_RETENTION
-
-Default: 90
-
-The number of days to retain logged changes (object creations, updates, and deletions). Set this to `0` to retain
-changes in the database indefinitely.
-
-!!! warning
-    If enabling indefinite changelog retention, it is recommended to periodically delete old entries. Otherwise, the database may eventually exceed capacity.
-
----
-
-## CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL
-
-Default: False
-
-If True, cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) requests will be accepted from all origins. If False, a whitelist will be used (see below).
-
----
-
-## CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST
-
-## CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST
-
-These settings specify a list of origins that are authorized to make cross-site API requests. Use
-`CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST` to define a list of exact hostnames, or `CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST` to define a set of regular 
-expressions. (These settings have no effect if `CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL` is True.) For example:
-
-```python
-CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST = [
-    'https://example.com',
-]
-```
-
----
-
-## CUSTOM_VALIDATORS
-
-This is a mapping of models to [custom validators](../customization/custom-validation.md) that have been defined locally to enforce custom validation logic. An example is provided below:
-
-```python
-CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
-    'dcim.site': (
-        Validator1,
-        Validator2,
-        Validator3
-    )
-}
-```
-
----
-
-## DEBUG
-
-Default: False
-
-This setting enables debugging. Debugging should be enabled only during development or troubleshooting. Note that only
-clients which access NetBox from a recognized [internal IP address](#internal_ips) will see debugging tools in the user
-interface.
-
-!!! warning
-    Never enable debugging on a production system, as it can expose sensitive data to unauthenticated users and impose a
-    substantial performance penalty.
-
----
-
-## DEVELOPER
-
-Default: False
-
-This parameter serves as a safeguard to prevent some potentially dangerous behavior, such as generating new database schema migrations. Set this to `True` **only** if you are actively developing the NetBox code base.
-
----
-
-## DOCS_ROOT
-
-Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/docs/`
-
-The filesystem path to NetBox's documentation. This is used when presenting context-sensitive documentation in the web UI. By default, this will be the `docs/` directory within the root NetBox installation path. (Set this to `None` to disable the embedded documentation.)
-
----
-
-## EMAIL
-
-In order to send email, NetBox needs an email server configured. The following items can be defined within the `EMAIL` configuration parameter:
-
-* `SERVER` - Hostname or IP address of the email server (use `localhost` if running locally)
-* `PORT` - TCP port to use for the connection (default: `25`)
-* `USERNAME` - Username with which to authenticate
-* `PASSSWORD` - Password with which to authenticate
-* `USE_SSL` - Use SSL when connecting to the server (default: `False`)
-* `USE_TLS` - Use TLS when connecting to the server (default: `False`)
-* `SSL_CERTFILE` - Path to the PEM-formatted SSL certificate file (optional)
-* `SSL_KEYFILE` - Path to the PEM-formatted SSL private key file (optional)
-* `TIMEOUT` - Amount of time to wait for a connection, in seconds (default: `10`)
-* `FROM_EMAIL` - Sender address for emails sent by NetBox
-
-!!! note
-    The `USE_SSL` and `USE_TLS` parameters are mutually exclusive.
-
-Email is sent from NetBox only for critical events or if configured for [logging](#logging). If you would like to test the email server configuration, Django provides a convenient [send_mail()](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/email/#send-mail) function accessible within the NetBox shell:
-
-```no-highlight
-# python ./manage.py nbshell
->>> from django.core.mail import send_mail
->>> send_mail(
-  'Test Email Subject',
-  'Test Email Body',
-  'noreply-netbox@example.com',
-  ['users@example.com'],
-  fail_silently=False
-)
-```
-
----
-
-## ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE
-
-Default: False
-
-By default, NetBox will permit users to create duplicate prefixes and IP addresses in the global table (that is, those which are not assigned to any VRF). This behavior can be disabled by setting `ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE` to True.
-
----
-
-## EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS
-
-Default: Empty list
-
-A list of NetBox models to exempt from the enforcement of view permissions. Models listed here will be viewable by all users, both authenticated and anonymous.
-
-List models in the form `<app>.<model>`. For example:
-
-```python
-EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = [
-    'dcim.site',
-    'dcim.region',
-    'ipam.prefix',
-]
-```
-
-To exempt _all_ models from view permission enforcement, set the following. (Note that `EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS` must be an iterable.)
-
-```python
-EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = ['*']
-```
-
-!!! note
-    Using a wildcard will not affect certain potentially sensitive models, such as user permissions. If there is a need to exempt these models, they must be specified individually.
-
----
-
-## GRAPHQL_ENABLED
-
-Default: True
-
-Setting this to False will disable the GraphQL API.
-
----
-
-## HTTP_PROXIES
-
-Default: None
-
-A dictionary of HTTP proxies to use for outbound requests originating from NetBox (e.g. when sending webhook requests). Proxies should be specified by schema (HTTP and HTTPS) as per the [Python requests library documentation](https://2.python-requests.org/en/master/user/advanced/). For example:
-
-```python
-HTTP_PROXIES = {
-    'http': 'http://10.10.1.10:3128',
-    'https': 'http://10.10.1.10:1080',
-}
-```
-
----
-
-## INTERNAL_IPS
-
-Default: `('127.0.0.1', '::1')`
-
-A list of IP addresses recognized as internal to the system, used to control the display of debugging output. For
-example, the debugging toolbar will be viewable only when a client is accessing NetBox from one of the listed IP
-addresses (and [`DEBUG`](#debug) is true).
-
----
-
-## LOGGING
-
-By default, all messages of INFO severity or higher will be logged to the console. Additionally, if [`DEBUG`](#debug) is False and email access has been configured, ERROR and CRITICAL messages will be emailed to the users defined in [`ADMINS`](#admins).
-
-The Django framework on which NetBox runs allows for the customization of logging format and destination. Please consult the [Django logging documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/logging/) for more information on configuring this setting. Below is an example which will write all INFO and higher messages to a local file:
-
-```python
-LOGGING = {
-    'version': 1,
-    'disable_existing_loggers': False,
-    'handlers': {
-        'file': {
-            'level': 'INFO',
-            'class': 'logging.FileHandler',
-            'filename': '/var/log/netbox.log',
-        },
-    },
-    'loggers': {
-        'django': {
-            'handlers': ['file'],
-            'level': 'INFO',
-        },
-    },
-}
-```
-
-### Available Loggers
-
-* `netbox.<app>.<model>` - Generic form for model-specific log messages
-* `netbox.auth.*` - Authentication events
-* `netbox.api.views.*` - Views which handle business logic for the REST API
-* `netbox.reports.*` - Report execution (`module.name`)
-* `netbox.scripts.*` - Custom script execution (`module.name`)
-* `netbox.views.*` - Views which handle business logic for the web UI
-
----
-
-## LOGIN_PERSISTENCE
-
-Default: False
-
-If true, the lifetime of a user's authentication session will be automatically reset upon each valid request. For example, if [`LOGIN_TIMEOUT`](#login_timeout) is configured to 14 days (the default), and a user whose session is due to expire in five days makes a NetBox request (with a valid session cookie), the session's lifetime will be reset to 14 days.
-
-Note that enabling this setting causes NetBox to update a user's session in the database (or file, as configured per [`SESSION_FILE_PATH`](#session_file_path)) with each request, which may introduce significant overhead in very active environments. It also permits an active user to remain authenticated to NetBox indefinitely.
-
----
-
-## LOGIN_REQUIRED
-
-Default: False
-
-Setting this to True will permit only authenticated users to access any part of NetBox. By default, anonymous users are permitted to access most data in NetBox but not make any changes.
-
----
-
-## LOGIN_TIMEOUT
-
-Default: 1209600 seconds (14 days)
-
-The lifetime (in seconds) of the authentication cookie issued to a NetBox user upon login.
-
----
-
-## MAINTENANCE_MODE
-
-Default: False
-
-Setting this to True will display a "maintenance mode" banner at the top of every page. Additionally, NetBox will no longer update a user's "last active" time upon login. This is to allow new logins when the database is in a read-only state. Recording of login times will resume when maintenance mode is disabled.
-
----
-
-## MAPS_URL
-
-Default: `https://maps.google.com/?q=` (Google Maps)
-
-This specifies the URL to use when presenting a map of a physical location by street address or GPS coordinates. The URL must accept either a free-form street address or a comma-separated pair of numeric coordinates appended to it.
-
----
-
-## MAX_PAGE_SIZE
-
-Default: 1000
-
-A web user or API consumer can request an arbitrary number of objects by appending the "limit" parameter to the URL (e.g. `?limit=1000`). This parameter defines the maximum acceptable limit. Setting this to `0` or `None` will allow a client to retrieve _all_ matching objects at once with no limit by specifying `?limit=0`.
-
----
-
-## MEDIA_ROOT
-
-Default: $INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/media/
-
-The file path to the location where media files (such as image attachments) are stored. By default, this is the `netbox/media/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
-
----
-
-## METRICS_ENABLED
-
-Default: False
-
-Toggle the availability Prometheus-compatible metrics at `/metrics`. See the [Prometheus Metrics](../additional-features/prometheus-metrics.md) documentation for more details.
-
----
-
-## NAPALM_USERNAME
-
-## NAPALM_PASSWORD
-
-NetBox will use these credentials when authenticating to remote devices via the supported [NAPALM integration](../additional-features/napalm.md), if installed. Both parameters are optional.
-
-!!! note
-    If SSH public key authentication has been set up on the remote device(s) for the system account under which NetBox runs, these parameters are not needed.
-
----
-
-## NAPALM_ARGS
-
-A dictionary of optional arguments to pass to NAPALM when instantiating a network driver. See the NAPALM documentation for a [complete list of optional arguments](https://napalm.readthedocs.io/en/latest/support/#optional-arguments). An example:
-
-```python
-NAPALM_ARGS = {
-    'api_key': '472071a93b60a1bd1fafb401d9f8ef41',
-    'port': 2222,
-}
-```
-
-Some platforms (e.g. Cisco IOS) require an argument named `secret` to be passed in addition to the normal password. If desired, you can use the configured `NAPALM_PASSWORD` as the value for this argument:
-
-```python
-NAPALM_USERNAME = 'username'
-NAPALM_PASSWORD = 'MySecretPassword'
-NAPALM_ARGS = {
-    'secret': NAPALM_PASSWORD,
-    # Include any additional args here
-}
-```
-
----
-
-## NAPALM_TIMEOUT
-
-Default: 30 seconds
-
-The amount of time (in seconds) to wait for NAPALM to connect to a device.
-
----
-
-## PAGINATE_COUNT
-
-Default: 50
-
-The default maximum number of objects to display per page within each list of objects.
-
----
-
-## PLUGINS
-
-Default: Empty
-
-A list of installed [NetBox plugins](../../plugins/) to enable. Plugins will not take effect unless they are listed here.
-
-!!! warning
-    Plugins extend NetBox by allowing external code to run with the same access and privileges as NetBox itself. Only install plugins from trusted sources. The NetBox maintainers make absolutely no guarantees about the integrity or security of your installation with plugins enabled.
-
----
-
-## PLUGINS_CONFIG
-
-Default: Empty
-
-This parameter holds configuration settings for individual NetBox plugins. It is defined as a dictionary, with each key using the name of an installed plugin. The specific parameters supported are unique to each plugin: Reference the plugin's documentation to determine the supported parameters. An example configuration is shown below:
-
-```python
-PLUGINS_CONFIG = {
-    'plugin1': {
-        'foo': 123,
-        'bar': True
-    },
-    'plugin2': {
-        'foo': 456,
-    },
-}
-```
-
-Note that a plugin must be listed in `PLUGINS` for its configuration to take effect.
-
----
-
-## PREFER_IPV4
-
-Default: False
-
-When determining the primary IP address for a device, IPv6 is preferred over IPv4 by default. Set this to True to prefer IPv4 instead.
-
----
-
-## RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_HEIGHT
-
-Default: 22
-
-Default height (in pixels) of a unit within a rack elevation. For best results, this should be approximately one tenth of `RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_WIDTH`.
-
----
-
-## RACK_ELEVATION_DEFAULT_UNIT_WIDTH
-
-Default: 220
-
-Default width (in pixels) of a unit within a rack elevation.
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_AUTO_CREATE_USER
-
-Default: `False`
-
-If true, NetBox will automatically create local accounts for users authenticated via a remote service. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND
-
-Default: `'netbox.authentication.RemoteUserBackend'`
-
-This is the Python path to the custom [Django authentication backend](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/auth/customizing/) to use for external user authentication. NetBox provides two built-in backends (listed below), though custom authentication backends may also be provided by other packages or plugins.
-
-* `netbox.authentication.RemoteUserBackend`
-* `netbox.authentication.LDAPBackend`
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_DEFAULT_GROUPS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of groups to assign a new user account when created using remote authentication. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_DEFAULT_PERMISSIONS
-
-Default: `{}` (Empty dictionary)
-
-A mapping of permissions to assign a new user account when created using remote authentication. Each key in the dictionary should be set to a dictionary of the attributes to be applied to the permission, or `None` to allow all objects. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED
-
-Default: `False`
-
-NetBox can be configured to support remote user authentication by inferring user authentication from an HTTP header set by the HTTP reverse proxy (e.g. nginx or Apache). Set this to `True` to enable this functionality. (Local authentication will still take effect as a fallback.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED
-
-Default: `False`
-
-NetBox can be configured to sync remote user groups by inferring user authentication from an HTTP header set by the HTTP reverse proxy (e.g. nginx or Apache). Set this to `True` to enable this functionality. (Local authentication will still take effect as a fallback.) (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_HEADER
-
-Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER'`
-
-When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_HEADER
-
-Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER_GROUP'`
-
-When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User-Groups` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER_GROUPS`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_SUPERUSER_GROUPS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of groups that promote an remote User to Superuser on Login. If group isn't present on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_SUPERUSERS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of users that get promoted to Superuser on Login. If user isn't present in list on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_STAFF_GROUPS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of groups that promote an remote User to Staff on Login. If group isn't present on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_STAFF_USERS
-
-Default: `[]` (Empty list)
-
-The list of users that get promoted to Staff on Login. If user isn't present in list on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SEPARATOR
-
-Default: `|` (Pipe)
-
-The Seperator upon which `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_HEADER` gets split into individual Groups. This needs to be coordinated with your authentication Proxy. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
-
----
-
-## RELEASE_CHECK_URL
-
-Default: None (disabled)
-
-This parameter defines the URL of the repository that will be checked for new NetBox releases. When a new release is detected, a message will be displayed to administrative users on the home page. This can be set to the official repository (`'https://api.github.com/repos/netbox-community/netbox/releases'`) or a custom fork. Set this to `None` to disable automatic update checks.
-
-!!! note
-    The URL provided **must** be compatible with the [GitHub REST API](https://docs.github.com/en/rest).
-
----
-
-## REPORTS_ROOT
-
-Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/reports/`
-
-The file path to the location where [custom reports](../customization/reports.md) will be kept. By default, this is the `netbox/reports/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
-
----
-
-## RQ_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT
-
-Default: `300`
-
-The maximum execution time of a background task (such as running a custom script), in seconds.
-
----
-
-## SCRIPTS_ROOT
-
-Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/scripts/`
-
-The file path to the location where [custom scripts](../customization/custom-scripts.md) will be kept. By default, this is the `netbox/scripts/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
-
----
-
-## SESSION_COOKIE_NAME
-
-Default: `sessionid`
-
-The name used for the session cookie. See the [Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#session-cookie-name) for more detail.
-
----
-
-## SESSION_FILE_PATH
-
-Default: None
-
-HTTP session data is used to track authenticated users when they access NetBox. By default, NetBox stores session data in its PostgreSQL database. However, this inhibits authentication to a standby instance of NetBox without write access to the database. Alternatively, a local file path may be specified here and NetBox will store session data as files instead of using the database. Note that the NetBox system user must have read and write permissions to this path.
-
----
-
-## STORAGE_BACKEND
-
-Default: None (local storage)
-
-The backend storage engine for handling uploaded files (e.g. image attachments). NetBox supports integration with the [`django-storages`](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) package, which provides backends for several popular file storage services. If not configured, local filesystem storage will be used.
-
-The configuration parameters for the specified storage backend are defined under the `STORAGE_CONFIG` setting.
-
----
-
-## STORAGE_CONFIG
-
-Default: Empty
-
-A dictionary of configuration parameters for the storage backend configured as `STORAGE_BACKEND`. The specific parameters to be used here are specific to each backend; see the [`django-storages` documentation](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) for more detail.
-
-If `STORAGE_BACKEND` is not defined, this setting will be ignored.
-
----
-
-## TIME_ZONE
-
-Default: UTC
-
-The time zone NetBox will use when dealing with dates and times. It is recommended to use UTC time unless you have a specific need to use a local time zone. Please see the [list of available time zones](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_tz_database_time_zones).
-
----
-
-## Date and Time Formatting
-
-You may define custom formatting for date and times. For detailed instructions on writing format strings, please see [the Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/templates/builtins/#date). Default formats are listed below.
-
-```python
-DATE_FORMAT = 'N j, Y'               # June 26, 2016
-SHORT_DATE_FORMAT = 'Y-m-d'          # 2016-06-26
-TIME_FORMAT = 'g:i a'                # 1:23 p.m.
-SHORT_TIME_FORMAT = 'H:i:s'          # 13:23:00
-DATETIME_FORMAT = 'N j, Y g:i a'     # June 26, 2016 1:23 p.m.
-SHORT_DATETIME_FORMAT = 'Y-m-d H:i'  # 2016-06-26 13:23
-```

docs/configuration/plugins.md

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+# Plugin Parameters
+
+## PLUGINS
+
+Default: Empty
+
+A list of installed [NetBox plugins](../plugins/index.md) to enable. Plugins will not take effect unless they are listed here.
+
+!!! warning
+    Plugins extend NetBox by allowing external code to run with the same access and privileges as NetBox itself. Only install plugins from trusted sources. The NetBox maintainers make absolutely no guarantees about the integrity or security of your installation with plugins enabled.
+
+---
+
+## PLUGINS_CONFIG
+
+Default: Empty
+
+This parameter holds configuration settings for individual NetBox plugins. It is defined as a dictionary, with each key using the name of an installed plugin. The specific parameters supported are unique to each plugin: Reference the plugin's documentation to determine the supported parameters. An example configuration is shown below:
+
+```python
+PLUGINS_CONFIG = {
+    'plugin1': {
+        'foo': 123,
+        'bar': True
+    },
+    'plugin2': {
+        'foo': 456,
+    },
+}
+```
+
+Note that a plugin must be listed in `PLUGINS` for its configuration to take effect.
+
+---
+

docs/configuration/remote-authentication.md

@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+# Remote Authentication Settings
+
+The configuration parameters listed here control remote authentication for NetBox. Note that `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` must be true in order for these settings to take effect.
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_AUTO_CREATE_GROUPS
+
+Default: `False`
+
+If true, NetBox will automatically create groups specified in the `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_HEADER` header if they don't already exist. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_AUTO_CREATE_USER
+
+Default: `False`
+
+If true, NetBox will automatically create local accounts for users authenticated via a remote service. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_BACKEND
+
+Default: `'netbox.authentication.RemoteUserBackend'`
+
+This is the Python path to the custom [Django authentication backend](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/auth/customizing/) to use for external user authentication. NetBox provides two built-in backends (listed below), though custom authentication backends may also be provided by other packages or plugins. Provide a string for a single backend, or an iterable for multiple backends, which will be attempted in the order given.
+
+* `netbox.authentication.RemoteUserBackend`
+* `netbox.authentication.LDAPBackend`
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_DEFAULT_GROUPS
+
+Default: `[]` (Empty list)
+
+The list of groups to assign a new user account when created using remote authentication. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_DEFAULT_PERMISSIONS
+
+Default: `{}` (Empty dictionary)
+
+A mapping of permissions to assign a new user account when created using remote authentication. Each key in the dictionary should be set to a dictionary of the attributes to be applied to the permission, or `None` to allow all objects. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` as True and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` as False.)
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED
+
+Default: `False`
+
+NetBox can be configured to support remote user authentication by inferring user authentication from an HTTP header set by the HTTP reverse proxy (e.g. nginx or Apache). Set this to `True` to enable this functionality. (Local authentication will still take effect as a fallback.) (`REMOTE_AUTH_DEFAULT_GROUPS` will not function if `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` is disabled)
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_HEADER
+
+Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER_GROUP'`
+
+When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User-Groups` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER_GROUPS`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SEPARATOR
+
+Default: `|` (Pipe)
+
+The Separator upon which `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_HEADER` gets split into individual Groups. This needs to be coordinated with your authentication Proxy. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED
+
+Default: `False`
+
+NetBox can be configured to sync remote user groups by inferring user authentication from an HTTP header set by the HTTP reverse proxy (e.g. nginx or Apache). Set this to `True` to enable this functionality. (Local authentication will still take effect as a fallback.) (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_HEADER
+
+Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER'`
+
+When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
+
+!!! warning Verify Header Compatibility
+    Some WSGI servers may drop headers which contain unsupported characters. For instance, gunicorn v22.0 and later silently drops HTTP headers containing underscores. This behavior can be disabled by changing gunicorn's [`header_map`](https://docs.gunicorn.org/en/stable/settings.html#header-map) setting to `dangerous`.
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_USER_EMAIL
+
+Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER_EMAIL'`
+
+When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the email address of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User-Email` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER_EMAIL`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_USER_FIRST_NAME
+
+Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER_FIRST_NAME'`
+
+When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the first name of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User-First-Name` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER_FIRST_NAME`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_USER_LAST_NAME
+
+Default: `'HTTP_REMOTE_USER_LAST_NAME'`
+
+When remote user authentication is in use, this is the name of the HTTP header which informs NetBox of the last name of the currently authenticated user. For example, to use the request header `X-Remote-User-Last-Name` it needs to be set to `HTTP_X_REMOTE_USER_LAST_NAME`. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED`.)
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_SUPERUSER_GROUPS
+
+Default: `[]` (Empty list)
+
+The list of groups that promote an remote User to Superuser on Login. If group isn't present on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_SUPERUSERS
+
+Default: `[]` (Empty list)
+
+The list of users that get promoted to Superuser on Login. If user isn't present in list on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_STAFF_GROUPS
+
+Default: `[]` (Empty list)
+
+The list of groups that promote an remote User to Staff on Login. If group isn't present on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )
+
+---
+
+## REMOTE_AUTH_STAFF_USERS
+
+Default: `[]` (Empty list)
+
+The list of users that get promoted to Staff on Login. If user isn't present in list on next Login, the Role gets revoked. (Requires `REMOTE_AUTH_ENABLED` and `REMOTE_AUTH_GROUP_SYNC_ENABLED` )

docs/configuration/required-parameters.md

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 ## ALLOWED_HOSTS
 
-This is a list of valid fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs) and/or IP addresses that can be used to reach the NetBox service. Usually this is the same as the hostname for the NetBox server, but can also be different; for example, when using a reverse proxy serving the NetBox website under a different FQDN than the hostname of the NetBox server. To help guard against [HTTP Host header attackes](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/3.0/topics/security/#host-headers-virtual-hosting), NetBox will not permit access to the server via any other hostnames (or IPs).
+This is a list of valid fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs) and/or IP addresses that can be used to reach the NetBox service. Usually this is the same as the hostname for the NetBox server, but can also be different; for example, when using a reverse proxy serving the NetBox website under a different FQDN than the hostname of the NetBox server. To help guard against [HTTP Host header attacks](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/3.0/topics/security/#host-headers-virtual-hosting), NetBox will not permit access to the server via any other hostnames (or IPs).
 
 !!! note
     This parameter must always be defined as a list or tuple, even if only a single value is provided.
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ ALLOWED_HOSTS = ['*']
 
 ## DATABASE
 
-NetBox requires access to a PostgreSQL 9.6 or later database service to store data. This service can run locally on the NetBox server or on a remote system. The following parameters must be defined within the `DATABASE` dictionary:
+NetBox requires access to a PostgreSQL 13 or later database service to store data. This service can run locally on the NetBox server or on a remote system. The following parameters must be defined within the `DATABASE` dictionary:
 
 * `NAME` - Database name
 * `USER` - PostgreSQL username
@@ -33,11 +33,13 @@ NetBox requires access to a PostgreSQL 9.6 or later database service to store da
 * `HOST` - Name or IP address of the database server (use `localhost` if running locally)
 * `PORT` - TCP port of the PostgreSQL service; leave blank for default port (TCP/5432)
 * `CONN_MAX_AGE` - Lifetime of a [persistent database connection](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/databases/#persistent-connections), in seconds (300 is the default)
+* `ENGINE` - The database backend to use; must be a PostgreSQL-compatible backend (e.g. `django.db.backends.postgresql`)
 
 Example:
 
 ```python
 DATABASE = {
+    'ENGINE': 'django.db.backends.postgresql',
     'NAME': 'netbox',               # Database name
     'USER': 'netbox',               # PostgreSQL username
     'PASSWORD': 'J5brHrAXFLQSif0K', # PostgreSQL password
@@ -50,19 +52,20 @@ DATABASE = {
 !!! note
     NetBox supports all PostgreSQL database options supported by the underlying Django framework. For a complete list of available parameters, please see [the Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#databases).
 
+!!! warning
+    Make sure to use a PostgreSQL-compatible backend for the ENGINE setting. If you don't specify an ENGINE, the default will be django.db.backends.postgresql.
+
 ---
 
 ## REDIS
 
-[Redis](https://redis.io/) is an in-memory data store similar to memcached. While Redis has been an optional component of
-NetBox since the introduction of webhooks in version 2.4, it is required starting in 2.6 to support NetBox's caching
-functionality (as well as other planned features). In 2.7, the connection settings were broken down into two sections for
-task queuing and caching, allowing the user to connect to different Redis instances/databases per feature.
+[Redis](https://redis.io/) is a lightweight in-memory data store similar to memcached. NetBox employs Redis for background task queuing and other features.
 
 Redis is configured using a configuration setting similar to `DATABASE` and these settings are the same for both of the `tasks` and `caching` subsections:
 
 * `HOST` - Name or IP address of the Redis server (use `localhost` if running locally)
 * `PORT` - TCP port of the Redis service; leave blank for default port (6379)
+* `USERNAME` - Redis username (if set)
 * `PASSWORD` - Redis password (if set)
 * `DATABASE` - Numeric database ID
 * `SSL` - Use SSL connection to Redis
@@ -75,6 +78,7 @@ REDIS = {
     'tasks': {
         'HOST': 'redis.example.com',
         'PORT': 1234,
+        'USERNAME': 'netbox',
         'PASSWORD': 'foobar',
         'DATABASE': 0,
         'SSL': False,
@@ -82,6 +86,7 @@ REDIS = {
     'caching': {
         'HOST': 'localhost',
         'PORT': 6379,
+        'USERNAME': '',
         'PASSWORD': '',
         'DATABASE': 1,
         'SSL': False,
@@ -89,15 +94,25 @@ REDIS = {
 }
 ```
 
-!!! note
-    If you are upgrading from a NetBox release older than v2.7.0, please note that the Redis connection configuration
-    settings have changed. Manual modification to bring the `REDIS` section inline with the above specification is
-    necessary
-
 !!! warning
     It is highly recommended to keep the task and cache databases separate. Using the same database number on the
     same Redis instance for both may result in queued background tasks being lost during cache flushing events.
 
+### UNIX Socket Support
+
+Redis may alternatively be configured by specifying a complete URL instead of individual components. This approach supports the use of a UNIX socket connection. For example:
+
+```python
+REDIS = {
+    'tasks': {
+        'URL': 'unix:///run/redis-netbox/redis.sock?db=0'
+    },
+    'caching': {
+        'URL': 'unix:///run/redis-netbox/redis.sock?db=1'
+    },
+}
+```
+
 ### Using Redis Sentinel
 
 If you are using [Redis Sentinel](https://redis.io/topics/sentinel) for high-availability purposes, there is minimal 
@@ -141,8 +156,6 @@ REDIS = {
 
 ## SECRET_KEY
 
-This is a secret, random string used to assist in the creation new cryptographic hashes for passwords and HTTP cookies. The key defined here should not be shared outside of the configuration file. `SECRET_KEY` can be changed at any time, however be aware that doing so will invalidate all existing sessions.
+This is a secret, pseudorandom string used to assist in the creation new cryptographic hashes for passwords and HTTP cookies. The key defined here should not be shared outside the configuration file. `SECRET_KEY` can be changed at any time without impacting stored data, however be aware that doing so will invalidate all existing user sessions. NetBox deployments comprising multiple nodes must have the same secret key configured on all nodes.
 
-Please note that this key is **not** used directly for hashing user passwords or for the encrypted storage of secret data in NetBox.
-
-`SECRET_KEY` should be at least 50 characters in length and contain a random mix of letters, digits, and symbols. The script located at `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/generate_secret_key.py` may be used to generate a suitable key.
+`SECRET_KEY` **must** be at least 50 characters in length, and should contain a mix of letters, digits, and symbols. The script located at `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/generate_secret_key.py` may be used to generate a suitable key. Please note that this key is **not** used directly for hashing user passwords or for the encrypted storage of secret data in NetBox.

docs/configuration/security.md

@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+# Security & Authentication Parameters
+
+## ALLOW_TOKEN_RETRIEVAL
+
+Default: True
+
+If disabled, the values of API tokens will not be displayed after each token's initial creation. A user **must** record the value of a token prior to its creation, or it will be lost. Note that this affects _all_ users, regardless of assigned permissions.
+
+---
+
+## ALLOWED_URL_SCHEMES
+
+!!! tip "Dynamic Configuration Parameter"
+
+Default: `('file', 'ftp', 'ftps', 'http', 'https', 'irc', 'mailto', 'sftp', 'ssh', 'tel', 'telnet', 'tftp', 'vnc', 'xmpp')`
+
+A list of permitted URL schemes referenced when rendering links within NetBox. Note that only the schemes specified in this list will be accepted: If adding your own, be sure to replicate all the default values as well (excluding those schemes which are not desirable).
+
+---
+
+## AUTH_PASSWORD_VALIDATORS
+
+This parameter acts as a pass-through for configuring Django's built-in password validators for local user accounts. These rules are applied whenever a user's password is created or updated to ensure that it meets minimum criteria such as length or complexity. The default configuration is shown below.
+
+```python
+AUTH_PASSWORD_VALIDATORS = [
+    {
+        "NAME": "django.contrib.auth.password_validation.MinimumLengthValidator",
+        "OPTIONS": {
+            "min_length": 12,
+        },
+    },
+    {
+        "NAME": "utilities.password_validation.AlphanumericPasswordValidator",
+    },
+]
+```
+
+The default configuration enforces the follow criteria:
+
+* A password must be at least 12 characters in length.
+* A password must have at least one uppercase letter, one lowercase letter, and one numeric digit.
+
+Although it is not recommended, the default validation rules can be disabled by setting `AUTH_PASSWORD_VALIDATORS = []` in the configuration file. For more detail on customizing password validation, please see [the Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/auth/passwords/#password-validation).
+
+---
+
+## CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL
+
+Default: False
+
+If True, cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) requests will be accepted from all origins. If False, a whitelist will be used (see below).
+
+---
+
+## CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST
+
+## CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST
+
+These settings specify a list of origins that are authorized to make cross-site API requests. Use
+`CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST` to define a list of exact hostnames, or `CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST` to define a set of regular 
+expressions. (These settings have no effect if `CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL` is True.) For example:
+
+```python
+CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST = [
+    'https://example.com',
+]
+```
+
+---
+
+## CSRF_COOKIE_NAME
+
+Default: `csrftoken`
+
+The name of the cookie to use for the cross-site request forgery (CSRF) authentication token. See the [Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#csrf-cookie-name) for more detail.
+
+---
+
+## CSRF_COOKIE_SECURE
+
+Default: False
+
+If true, the cookie employed for cross-site request forgery (CSRF) protection will be marked as secure, meaning that it can only be sent across an HTTPS connection.
+
+---
+
+## CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS
+
+Default: `[]`
+
+Defines a list of trusted origins for unsafe (e.g. `POST`) requests. This is a pass-through to Django's [`CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/4.0/ref/settings/#std:setting-CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS) setting. Note that each host listed must specify a scheme (e.g. `http://` or `https://).
+
+```python
+CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS = (
+    'http://netbox.local',
+    'https://netbox.local',
+)
+```
+
+---
+
+## DEFAULT_PERMISSIONS
+
+Default:
+
+```python
+{
+    'users.view_token': ({'user': '$user'},),
+    'users.add_token': ({'user': '$user'},),
+    'users.change_token': ({'user': '$user'},),
+    'users.delete_token': ({'user': '$user'},),
+}
+```
+
+This parameter defines object permissions that are applied automatically to _any_ authenticated user, regardless of what permissions have been defined in the database. By default, this parameter is defined to allow all users to manage their own API tokens, however it can be overriden for any purpose.
+
+For example, to allow all users to create a device role beginning with the word "temp," you could configure the following:
+
+```python
+DEFAULT_PERMISSIONS = {
+    'dcim.add_devicerole': (
+        {'name__startswith': 'temp'},
+    )
+}
+```
+
+!!! warning
+    Setting a custom value for this parameter will overwrite the default permission mapping shown above. If you want to retain the default mapping, be sure to reproduce it in your custom configuration.
+
+---
+
+## EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS
+
+Default: Empty list
+
+A list of NetBox models to exempt from the enforcement of view permissions. Models listed here will be viewable by all users, both authenticated and anonymous.
+
+List models in the form `<app>.<model>`. For example:
+
+```python
+EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = [
+    'dcim.site',
+    'dcim.region',
+    'ipam.prefix',
+]
+```
+
+To exempt _all_ models from view permission enforcement, set the following. (Note that `EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS` must be an iterable.)
+
+```python
+EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = ['*']
+```
+
+!!! note
+    Using a wildcard will not affect certain potentially sensitive models, such as user permissions. If there is a need to exempt these models, they must be specified individually.
+
+---
+
+## LOGIN_PERSISTENCE
+
+Default: False
+
+If true, the lifetime of a user's authentication session will be automatically reset upon each valid request. For example, if [`LOGIN_TIMEOUT`](#login_timeout) is configured to 14 days (the default), and a user whose session is due to expire in five days makes a NetBox request (with a valid session cookie), the session's lifetime will be reset to 14 days.
+
+Note that enabling this setting causes NetBox to update a user's session in the database (or file, as configured per [`SESSION_FILE_PATH`](#session_file_path)) with each request, which may introduce significant overhead in very active environments. It also permits an active user to remain authenticated to NetBox indefinitely.
+
+---
+
+## LOGIN_REQUIRED
+
+Default: True
+
+When enabled, only authenticated users are permitted to access any part of NetBox. Disabling this will allow unauthenticated users to access most areas of NetBox (but not make any changes).
+
+!!! info "Changed in NetBox v4.0.2"
+    Prior to NetBox v4.0.2, this setting was disabled by default.
+
+---
+
+## LOGIN_TIMEOUT
+
+Default: 1209600 seconds (14 days)
+
+The lifetime (in seconds) of the authentication cookie issued to a NetBox user upon login.
+
+---
+
+## LOGOUT_REDIRECT_URL
+
+Default: `'home'`
+
+The view name or URL to which a user is redirected after logging out.
+
+---
+
+## SECURE_HSTS_INCLUDE_SUBDOMAINS
+
+Default: False
+
+If true, the `includeSubDomains` directive will be included in the HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS) header. This directive instructs the browser to apply the HSTS policy to all subdomains of the current domain.
+
+---
+
+## SECURE_HSTS_PRELOAD
+
+Default: False
+
+If true, the `preload` directive will be included in the HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS) header. This directive instructs the browser to preload the site in HTTPS. Browsers that use the HSTS preload list will force the site to be accessed via HTTPS even if the user types HTTP in the address bar.
+
+---
+
+## SECURE_HSTS_SECONDS
+
+Default: 0
+
+If set to a non-zero integer value, the SecurityMiddleware sets the HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS) header on all responses that do not already have it. This will instruct the browser that the website must be accessed via HTTPS, blocking any HTTP request.
+
+---
+
+## SECURE_SSL_REDIRECT
+
+Default: False
+
+If true, all non-HTTPS requests will be automatically redirected to use HTTPS.
+
+!!! warning
+    Ensure that your frontend HTTP daemon has been configured to forward the HTTP scheme correctly before enabling this option. An incorrectly configured frontend may result in a looping redirect.
+
+---
+
+## SESSION_COOKIE_NAME
+
+Default: `sessionid`
+
+The name used for the session cookie. See the [Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#session-cookie-name) for more detail.
+
+---
+
+## SESSION_COOKIE_SECURE
+
+Default: False
+
+If true, the cookie employed for session authentication will be marked as secure, meaning that it can only be sent across an HTTPS connection.
+
+---
+
+## SESSION_FILE_PATH
+
+Default: None
+
+HTTP session data is used to track authenticated users when they access NetBox. By default, NetBox stores session data in its PostgreSQL database. However, this inhibits authentication to a standby instance of NetBox without write access to the database. Alternatively, a local file path may be specified here and NetBox will store session data as files instead of using the database. Note that the NetBox system user must have read and write permissions to this path.

docs/configuration/system.md

@@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
+# System Parameters
+
+## BASE_PATH
+
+Default: None
+
+The base URL path to use when accessing NetBox. Do not include the scheme or domain name. For example, if installed at https://example.com/netbox/, set:
+
+```python
+BASE_PATH = 'netbox/'
+```
+
+---
+
+## DEFAULT_LANGUAGE
+
+Default: `en-us` (US English)
+
+Defines the default preferred language/locale for requests that do not specify one. (This parameter maps to Django's [`LANGUAGE_CODE`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#language-code) internal setting.)
+
+---
+
+## DOCS_ROOT
+
+Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/docs/`
+
+The filesystem path to NetBox's documentation. This is used when presenting context-sensitive documentation in the web UI. By default, this will be the `docs/` directory within the root NetBox installation path. (Set this to `None` to disable the embedded documentation.)
+
+---
+
+## EMAIL
+
+In order to send email, NetBox needs an email server configured. The following items can be defined within the `EMAIL` configuration parameter:
+
+* `SERVER` - Hostname or IP address of the email server (use `localhost` if running locally)
+* `PORT` - TCP port to use for the connection (default: `25`)
+* `USERNAME` - Username with which to authenticate
+* `PASSWORD` - Password with which to authenticate
+* `USE_SSL` - Use SSL when connecting to the server (default: `False`)
+* `USE_TLS` - Use TLS when connecting to the server (default: `False`)
+* `SSL_CERTFILE` - Path to the PEM-formatted SSL certificate file (optional)
+* `SSL_KEYFILE` - Path to the PEM-formatted SSL private key file (optional)
+* `TIMEOUT` - Amount of time to wait for a connection, in seconds (default: `10`)
+* `FROM_EMAIL` - Sender address for emails sent by NetBox
+
+!!! note
+    The `USE_SSL` and `USE_TLS` parameters are mutually exclusive.
+
+Email is sent from NetBox only for critical events or if configured for [logging](#logging). If you would like to test the email server configuration, Django provides a convenient [send_mail()](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/email/#send-mail) function accessible within the NetBox shell:
+
+```no-highlight
+# python ./manage.py nbshell
+>>> from django.core.mail import send_mail
+>>> send_mail(
+  'Test Email Subject',
+  'Test Email Body',
+  'noreply-netbox@example.com',
+  ['users@example.com'],
+  fail_silently=False
+)
+```
+
+---
+
+## HTTP_PROXIES
+
+Default: None
+
+A dictionary of HTTP proxies to use for outbound requests originating from NetBox (e.g. when sending webhook requests). Proxies should be specified by schema (HTTP and HTTPS) as per the [Python requests library documentation](https://requests.readthedocs.io/en/latest/user/advanced/#proxies). For example:
+
+```python
+HTTP_PROXIES = {
+    'http': 'http://10.10.1.10:3128',
+    'https': 'http://10.10.1.10:1080',
+}
+```
+
+---
+
+## INTERNAL_IPS
+
+Default: `('127.0.0.1', '::1')`
+
+A list of IP addresses recognized as internal to the system, used to control the display of debugging output. For
+example, the debugging toolbar will be viewable only when a client is accessing NetBox from one of the listed IP
+addresses (and [`DEBUG`](./development.md#debug) is true).
+
+---
+
+## ISOLATED_DEPLOYMENT
+
+Default: False
+
+Set this configuration parameter to True for NetBox deployments which do not have Internet access. This will disable miscellaneous functionality which depends on access to the Internet.
+
+!!! note
+    If Internet access is available via a proxy, set [`HTTP_PROXIES`](#http_proxies) instead.
+
+---
+
+## JINJA2_FILTERS
+
+Default: `{}`
+
+A dictionary of custom jinja2 filters with the key being the filter name and the value being a callable. For more information see the [Jinja2 documentation](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/3.1.x/api/#custom-filters). For example:
+
+```python
+def uppercase(x):
+    return str(x).upper()
+
+JINJA2_FILTERS = {
+    'uppercase': uppercase,
+}
+```
+
+---
+
+## LOGGING
+
+By default, all messages of INFO severity or higher will be logged to the console. Additionally, if [`DEBUG`](./development.md#debug) is False and email access has been configured, ERROR and CRITICAL messages will be emailed to the users defined in [`ADMINS`](./miscellaneous.md#admins).
+
+The Django framework on which NetBox runs allows for the customization of logging format and destination. Please consult the [Django logging documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/logging/) for more information on configuring this setting. Below is an example which will write all INFO and higher messages to a local file:
+
+```python
+LOGGING = {
+    'version': 1,
+    'disable_existing_loggers': False,
+    'handlers': {
+        'file': {
+            'level': 'INFO',
+            'class': 'logging.FileHandler',
+            'filename': '/var/log/netbox.log',
+        },
+    },
+    'loggers': {
+        'django': {
+            'handlers': ['file'],
+            'level': 'INFO',
+        },
+    },
+}
+```
+
+### Available Loggers
+
+* `netbox.<app>.<model>` - Generic form for model-specific log messages
+* `netbox.auth.*` - Authentication events
+* `netbox.api.views.*` - Views which handle business logic for the REST API
+* `netbox.reports.*` - Report execution (`module.name`)
+* `netbox.scripts.*` - Custom script execution (`module.name`)
+* `netbox.views.*` - Views which handle business logic for the web UI
+
+---
+
+## MEDIA_ROOT
+
+Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/media/`
+
+The file path to the location where media files (such as image attachments) are stored. By default, this is the `netbox/media/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
+
+---
+
+## REPORTS_ROOT
+
+Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/reports/`
+
+The file path to the location where [custom reports](../customization/reports.md) will be kept. By default, this is the `netbox/reports/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
+
+---
+
+## SCRIPTS_ROOT
+
+Default: `$INSTALL_ROOT/netbox/scripts/`
+
+The file path to the location where [custom scripts](../customization/custom-scripts.md) will be kept. By default, this is the `netbox/scripts/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
+
+---
+
+## SEARCH_BACKEND
+
+Default: `'netbox.search.backends.CachedValueSearchBackend'`
+
+The dotted path to the desired search backend class. `CachedValueSearchBackend` is currently the only search backend provided in NetBox, however this setting can be used to enable a custom backend. 
+
+---
+
+## STORAGE_BACKEND
+
+Default: None (local storage)
+
+The backend storage engine for handling uploaded files (e.g. image attachments). NetBox supports integration with the [`django-storages`](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) and [`django-storage-swift`](https://github.com/dennisv/django-storage-swift) packages, which provide backends for several popular file storage services. If not configured, local filesystem storage will be used.
+
+The configuration parameters for the specified storage backend are defined under the `STORAGE_CONFIG` setting.
+
+---
+
+## STORAGE_CONFIG
+
+Default: Empty
+
+A dictionary of configuration parameters for the storage backend configured as `STORAGE_BACKEND`. The specific parameters to be used here are specific to each backend; see the documentation for your selected backend ([`django-storages`](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) or [`django-storage-swift`](https://github.com/dennisv/django-storage-swift)) for more detail.
+
+If `STORAGE_BACKEND` is not defined, this setting will be ignored.
+
+---
+
+## TIME_ZONE
+
+Default: UTC
+
+The time zone NetBox will use when dealing with dates and times. It is recommended to use UTC time unless you have a specific need to use a local time zone. Please see the [list of available time zones](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_tz_database_time_zones).
+
+---
+
+## TRANSLATION_ENABLED
+
+Default: True
+
+Enables language translation for the user interface. (This parameter maps to Django's [USE_I18N](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#std-setting-USE_I18N) setting.)

docs/core-functionality/circuits.md

@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-# Circuits
-
-{!models/circuits/provider.md!}
-{!models/circuits/providernetwork.md!}
-
----
-
-{!models/circuits/circuit.md!}
-{!models/circuits/circuittype.md!}
-{!models/circuits/circuittermination.md!}

docs/core-functionality/device-types.md

@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-# Device Types
-
-{!models/dcim/devicetype.md!}
-{!models/dcim/manufacturer.md!}
-
----
-
-## Device Component Templates
-
-Each device type is assigned a number of component templates which define the physical components within a device. These are:
-
-* Console ports
-* Console server ports
-* Power ports
-* Power outlets
-* Network interfaces
-* Front ports
-* Rear ports
-* Device bays (which house child devices)
-
-Whenever a new device is created, its components are automatically created per the templates assigned to its device type. For example, a Juniper EX4300-48T device type might have the following component templates defined:
-
-* One template for a console port ("Console")
-* Two templates for power ports ("PSU0" and "PSU1")
-* 48 templates for 1GE interfaces ("ge-0/0/0" through "ge-0/0/47")
-* Four templates for 10GE interfaces ("xe-0/2/0" through "xe-0/2/3")
-
-Once component templates have been created, every new device that you create as an instance of this type will automatically be assigned each of the components listed above.
-
-!!! note
-    Assignment of components from templates occurs only at the time of device creation. If you modify the templates of a device type, it will not affect devices which have already been created. However, you always have the option of adding, modifying, or deleting components on existing devices.
-
-{!models/dcim/consoleporttemplate.md!}
-{!models/dcim/consoleserverporttemplate.md!}
-{!models/dcim/powerporttemplate.md!}
-{!models/dcim/poweroutlettemplate.md!}
-{!models/dcim/interfacetemplate.md!}
-{!models/dcim/frontporttemplate.md!}
-{!models/dcim/rearporttemplate.md!}
-{!models/dcim/devicebaytemplate.md!}

docs/core-functionality/devices.md

@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-# Devices and Cabling
-
-{!models/dcim/device.md!}
-{!models/dcim/devicerole.md!}
-{!models/dcim/platform.md!}
-
----
-
-## Device Components
-
-Device components represent discrete objects within a device which are used to terminate cables, house child devices, or track resources.
-
-{!models/dcim/consoleport.md!}
-{!models/dcim/consoleserverport.md!}
-{!models/dcim/powerport.md!}
-{!models/dcim/poweroutlet.md!}
-{!models/dcim/interface.md!}
-{!models/dcim/frontport.md!}
-{!models/dcim/rearport.md!}
-{!models/dcim/devicebay.md!}
-{!models/dcim/inventoryitem.md!}
-
----
-
-{!models/dcim/virtualchassis.md!}
-
----
-
-{!models/dcim/cable.md!}

docs/core-functionality/ipam.md

@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-# IP Address Management
-
-{!models/ipam/aggregate.md!}
-{!models/ipam/rir.md!}
-
----
-
-{!models/ipam/prefix.md!}
-{!models/ipam/role.md!}
-
----
-
-{!models/ipam/iprange.md!}
-{!models/ipam/ipaddress.md!}
-
----
-
-{!models/ipam/vrf.md!}
-{!models/ipam/routetarget.md!}

docs/core-functionality/power.md

@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-# Power Tracking
-
-{!models/dcim/powerpanel.md!}
-{!models/dcim/powerfeed.md!}
-
-# Example Power Topology
-
-![Power distribution model](/media/power_distribution.png)

docs/core-functionality/services.md

@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-# Service Mapping
-
-{!models/ipam/service.md!}

docs/core-functionality/sites-and-racks.md

@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-# Sites and Racks
-
-{!models/dcim/region.md!}
-{!models/dcim/sitegroup.md!}
-{!models/dcim/site.md!}
-{!models/dcim/location.md!}
-
----
-
-{!models/dcim/rack.md!}
-{!models/dcim/rackrole.md!}
-{!models/dcim/rackreservation.md!}

docs/core-functionality/tenancy.md

@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-# Tenancy Assignment
-
-{!models/tenancy/tenant.md!}
-{!models/tenancy/tenantgroup.md!}

docs/core-functionality/virtualization.md

@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-# Virtualization
-
-{!models/virtualization/cluster.md!}
-{!models/virtualization/clustertype.md!}
-{!models/virtualization/clustergroup.md!}
-
----
-
-{!models/virtualization/virtualmachine.md!}
-{!models/virtualization/vminterface.md!}

docs/core-functionality/vlans.md

@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-# VLAN Management
-
-{!models/ipam/vlan.md!}
-{!models/ipam/vlangroup.md!}

docs/customization/custom-fields.md

@@ -1,4 +1,80 @@
-{!models/extras/customfield.md!}
+# Custom Fields
+
+Each model in NetBox is represented in the database as a discrete table, and each attribute of a model exists as a column within its table. For example, sites are stored in the `dcim_site` table, which has columns named `name`, `facility`, `physical_address`, and so on. As new attributes are added to objects throughout the development of NetBox, tables are expanded to include new rows.
+
+However, some users might want to store additional object attributes that are somewhat esoteric in nature, and that would not make sense to include in the core NetBox database schema. For instance, suppose your organization needs to associate each device with a ticket number correlating it with an internal support system record. This is certainly a legitimate use for NetBox, but it's not a common enough need to warrant including a field for _every_ NetBox installation. Instead, you can create a custom field to hold this data.
+
+Within the database, custom fields are stored as JSON data directly alongside each object. This alleviates the need for complex queries when retrieving objects.
+
+## Creating Custom Fields
+
+Custom fields may be created by navigating to Customization > Custom Fields. NetBox supports many types of custom field:
+
+* Text: Free-form text (intended for single-line use)
+* Long text: Free-form of any length; supports Markdown rendering
+* Integer: A whole number (positive or negative)
+* Decimal: A fixed-precision decimal number (4 decimal places)
+* Boolean: True or false
+* Date: A date in ISO 8601 format (YYYY-MM-DD)
+* Date & time: A date and time in ISO 8601 format (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS)
+* URL: This will be presented as a link in the web UI
+* JSON: Arbitrary data stored in JSON format
+* Selection: A selection of one of several pre-defined custom choices
+* Multiple selection: A selection field which supports the assignment of multiple values
+* Object: A single NetBox object of the type defined by `object_type`
+* Multiple object: One or more NetBox objects of the type defined by `object_type`
+
+Each custom field must have a name. This should be a simple database-friendly string (e.g. `tps_report`) and may contain only alphanumeric characters and underscores. You may also assign a corresponding human-friendly label (e.g. "TPS report"); the label will be displayed on web forms. A weight is also required: Higher-weight fields will be ordered lower within a form. (The default weight is 100.) If a description is provided, it will appear beneath the field in a form.
+
+Marking a field as required will force the user to provide a value for the field when creating a new object or when saving an existing object. A default value for the field may also be provided. Use "true" or "false" for boolean fields, or the exact value of a choice for selection fields.
+
+A custom field must be assigned to one or more object types, or models, in NetBox. Once created, custom fields will automatically appear as part of these models in the web UI and REST API. Note that not all models support custom fields.
+
+### Filtering
+
+The filter logic controls how values are matched when filtering objects by the custom field. Loose filtering (the default) matches on a partial value, whereas exact matching requires a complete match of the given string to a field's value. For example, exact filtering with the string "red" will only match the exact value "red", whereas loose filtering will match on the values "red", "red-orange", or "bored". Setting the filter logic to "disabled" disables filtering by the field entirely.
+
+### Grouping
+
+Related custom fields can be grouped together within the UI by assigning each the same group name. When at least one custom field for an object type has a group defined, it will appear under the group heading within the custom fields panel under the object view. All custom fields with the same group name will appear under that heading. (Note that the group names must match exactly, or each will appear as a separate heading.)
+
+This parameter has no effect on the API representation of custom field data.
+
+### Visibility & Editing
+
+When creating a custom field, users can control the conditions under which it may be displayed and edited within the NetBox user interface. The following choices are available for controlling the display of a custom field on an object:
+
+* **Always** (default): The custom field is included when viewing an object.
+* **If Set**: The custom field is included only if a value has been defined for the object.
+* **Hidden**: The custom field will never be displayed within the UI. This option is recommended for fields which are not intended for use by human users.
+
+Additionally, the following options are available for controlling whether custom field values can be altered within the NetBox UI:
+
+* **Yes** (default): The custom field's value may be modified when editing an object.
+* **No**: The custom field is displayed for reference when editing an object, but its value may not be modified.
+* **Hidden**: The custom field is not displayed when editing an object.
+
+Note that this setting has no impact on the REST or GraphQL APIs: Custom field data will always be available via either API.
+
+### Validation
+
+NetBox supports limited custom validation for custom field values. Following are the types of validation enforced for each field type:
+
+* Text: Regular expression (optional)
+* Integer: Minimum and/or maximum value (optional)
+* Selection: Must exactly match one of the prescribed choices
+
+### Custom Selection Fields
+
+Each custom selection field must designate a [choice set](../models/extras/customfieldchoiceset.md) containing at least two choices. These are specified as a comma-separated list.
+
+If a default value is specified for a selection field, it must exactly match one of the provided choices. The value of a multiple selection field will always return a list, even if only one value is selected.
+
+### Custom Object Fields
+
+An object or multi-object custom field can be used to refer to a particular NetBox object or objects as the "value" for a custom field. These custom fields must define an `object_type`, which determines the type of object to which custom field instances point.
+
+By default, an object choice field will make all objects of that type available for selection in the drop-down. The list choices can be filtered to show only objects with certain values by providing a `query_params` dict in the Related Object Filter field, as a JSON value. More information about `query_params` can be found [here](./custom-scripts.md#objectvar).
 
 ## Custom Fields in Templates
 

docs/customization/custom-links.md

@@ -1 +1,65 @@
-{!models/extras/customlink.md!}
+# Custom Links
+
+Custom links allow users to display arbitrary hyperlinks to external content within NetBox object views. These are helpful for cross-referencing related records in systems outside NetBox. For example, you might create a custom link on the device view which links to the current device in a Network Monitoring System (NMS).
+
+Custom links are created by navigating to Customization > Custom Links. Each link is associated with a particular NetBox object type (site, device, prefix, etc.) and will be displayed on relevant views. Each link has display text and a URL, and data from the NetBox item being viewed can be included in the link using [Jinja template code](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/en/stable/) through the variable `object`, and custom fields through `object.cf`.
+
+For example, you might define a link like this:
+
+* Text: `View NMS`
+* URL: `https://nms.example.com/nodes/?name={{ object.name }}`
+
+When viewing a device named Router4, this link would render as:
+
+```no-highlight
+<a href="https://nms.example.com/nodes/?name=Router4">View NMS</a>
+```
+
+Custom links appear as buttons in the top right corner of the page. Numeric weighting can be used to influence the ordering of links, and each link can be enabled or disabled individually.
+
+!!! warning
+    Custom links rely on user-created code to generate arbitrary HTML output, which may be dangerous. Only grant permission to create or modify custom links to trusted users.
+
+## Context Data
+
+The following context data is available within the template when rendering a custom link's text or URL.
+
+| Variable  | Description                                                                                                       |
+|-----------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `object`  | The NetBox object being displayed                                                                                 |
+| `debug`   | A boolean indicating whether debugging is enabled                                                                 |
+| `request` | The current WSGI request                                                                                          |
+| `user`    | The current user (if authenticated)                                                                               |
+| `perms`   | The [permissions](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/auth/default/#permissions) assigned to the user |
+
+While most of the context variables listed above will have consistent attributes, the object will be an instance of the specific object being viewed when the link is rendered. Different models have different fields and properties, so you may need to some research to determine the attributes available for use within your template for a specific object type.
+
+Checking the REST API representation of an object is generally a convenient way to determine what attributes are available. You can also reference the NetBox source code directly for a comprehensive list.
+
+## Conditional Rendering
+
+Only links which render with non-empty text are included on the page. You can employ conditional Jinja2 logic to control the conditions under which a link gets rendered.
+
+For example, if you only want to display a link for active devices, you could set the link text to
+
+```jinja2
+{% if object.status == 'active' %}View NMS{% endif %}
+```
+
+The link will not appear when viewing a device with any status other than "active."
+
+As another example, if you wanted to show only devices belonging to a certain manufacturer, you could do something like this:
+
+```jinja2
+{% if object.device_type.manufacturer.name == 'Cisco' %}View NMS{% endif %}
+```
+
+The link will only appear when viewing a device with a manufacturer name of "Cisco."
+
+## Link Groups
+
+Group names can be specified to organize links into groups. Links with the same group name will render as a dropdown menu beneath a single button bearing the name of the group.
+
+## Table Columns
+
+Custom links can also be included in object tables by selecting the desired links from the table configuration form. When displayed, each link will render as a hyperlink for its corresponding object. When exported (e.g. as CSV data), each link render only its URL.

docs/customization/custom-scripts.md

@@ -5,8 +5,20 @@ Custom scripting was introduced to provide a way for users to execute custom log
 * Automatically populate new devices and cables in preparation for a new site deployment
 * Create a range of new reserved prefixes or IP addresses
 * Fetch data from an external source and import it to NetBox
+* Update objects with invalid or incomplete data
 
-Custom scripts are Python code and exist outside of the official NetBox code base, so they can be updated and changed without interfering with the core NetBox installation. And because they're completely custom, there is no inherent limitation on what a script can accomplish.
+They can also be used as a mechanism for validating the integrity of data within NetBox. Script authors can define test to check object against specific rules and conditions. For example, you can write script to check that:
+
+* All top-of-rack switches have a console connection
+* Every router has a loopback interface with an IP address assigned
+* Each interface description conforms to a standard format
+* Every site has a minimum set of VLANs defined
+* All IP addresses have a parent prefix
+
+Custom scripts are Python code which exists outside the NetBox code base, so they can be updated and changed without interfering with the core NetBox installation. And because they're completely custom, there is no inherent limitation on what a script can accomplish.
+
+!!! danger "Only install trusted scripts"
+    Custom scripts have unrestricted access to change anything in the databse and are inherently unsafe and should only be installed and run from trusted sources.  You should also review and set permissions for who can run scripts if the script can modify any data.
 
 ## Writing Custom Scripts
 
@@ -35,12 +47,9 @@ class MyScript(Script):
 
 The `run()` method should accept two arguments:
 
-* `data` - A dictionary containing all of the variable data passed via the web form.
+* `data` - A dictionary containing all the variable data passed via the web form.
 * `commit` - A boolean indicating whether database changes will be committed.
 
-!!! note
-    The `commit` argument was introduced in NetBox v2.7.8. Backward compatibility is maintained for scripts which accept only the `data` argument, however beginning with v2.10 NetBox will require the `run()` method of every script to accept both arguments. (Either argument may still be ignored within the method.)
-
 Defining script variables is optional: You may create a script with only a `run()` method if no user input is needed.
 
 Any output generated by the script during its execution will be displayed under the "output" tab in the UI.
@@ -59,16 +68,13 @@ class AnotherCustomScript(Script):
 script_order = (MyCustomScript, AnotherCustomScript)
 ```
 
-## Module Attributes
-
-### `name`
-
-You can define `name` within a script module (the Python file which contains one or more scripts) to set the module name. If `name` is not defined, the module's file name will be used.
-
 ## Script Attributes
 
 Script attributes are defined under a class named `Meta` within the script. These are optional, but encouraged.
 
+!!! warning
+    These are also defined and used as properties on the base custom script class, so don't use the same names as variables or override them in your custom script.
+
 ### `name`
 
 This is the human-friendly names of your script. If omitted, the class name will be used.
@@ -77,6 +83,25 @@ This is the human-friendly names of your script. If omitted, the class name will
 
 A human-friendly description of what your script does.
 
+### `field_order`
+
+By default, script variables will be ordered in the form as they are defined in the script. `field_order` may be defined as an iterable of field names to determine the order in which variables are rendered within a default "Script Data" group. Any fields not included in this iterable be listed last. If `fieldsets` is defined, `field_order` will be ignored.  A fieldset group for "Script Execution Parameters" will be added to the end of the form by default for the user.
+
+### `fieldsets`
+
+`fieldsets` may be defined as an iterable of field groups and their field names to determine the order in which variables are group and rendered. Any fields not included in this iterable will not be displayed in the form. If `fieldsets` is defined, `field_order` will be ignored.  A fieldset group for "Script Execution Parameters" will be added to the end of the fieldsets by default for the user.
+
+An example fieldset definition is provided below:
+
+```python
+class MyScript(Script):
+    class Meta:
+        fieldsets = (
+            ('First group', ('field1', 'field2', 'field3')),
+            ('Second group', ('field4', 'field5')),
+        )
+```
+
 ### `commit_default`
 
 The checkbox to commit database changes when executing a script is checked by default. Set `commit_default` to False under the script's Meta class to leave this option unchecked by default.
@@ -85,6 +110,14 @@ The checkbox to commit database changes when executing a script is checked by de
 commit_default = False
 ```
 
+### `scheduling_enabled`
+
+By default, a script can be scheduled for execution at a later time. Setting `scheduling_enabled` to False disables this ability: Only immediate execution will be possible. (This also disables the ability to set a recurring execution interval.)
+
+### `job_timeout`
+
+Set the maximum allowed runtime for the script. If not set, `RQ_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT` will be used.
+
 ## Accessing Request Data
 
 Details of the current HTTP request (the one being made to execute the script) are available as the instance attribute `self.request`. This can be used to infer, for example, the user executing the script and the client IP address:
@@ -111,13 +144,101 @@ These two methods will load data in YAML or JSON format, respectively, from file
 
 The Script object provides a set of convenient functions for recording messages at different severity levels:
 
-* `log_debug`
-* `log_success`
-* `log_info`
-* `log_warning`
-* `log_failure`
+* `log_debug(message=None, obj=None)`
+* `log_success(message=None, obj=None)`
+* `log_info(message=None, obj=None)`
+* `log_warning(message=None, obj=None)`
+* `log_failure(message=None, obj=None)`
 
-Log messages are returned to the user upon execution of the script. Markdown rendering is supported for log messages.
+Log messages are returned to the user upon execution of the script. Markdown rendering is supported for log messages. A message may optionally be associated with a particular object by passing it as the second argument to the logging method.
+
+## Test Methods
+
+A script can define one or more test methods to report on certain conditions. All test methods must have a name beginning with `test_` and accept no arguments beyond `self`.
+
+These methods are detected and run automatically when the script is executed, unless its `run()` method has been overridden. (When overriding `run()`, `run_tests()` can be called to run all test methods present in the script.)
+
+Calling any of these logging methods without a message will increment the relevant counter, but will not generate an output line in the script's log.
+
+!!! info
+    This functionality was ported from [legacy reports](./reports.md) in NetBox v4.0.
+
+### Example
+
+```
+from dcim.choices import DeviceStatusChoices
+from dcim.models import ConsolePort, Device, PowerPort
+from extras.scripts import Script
+
+
+class DeviceConnectionsReport(Script):
+    description = "Validate the minimum physical connections for each device"
+
+    def test_console_connection(self):
+
+        # Check that every console port for every active device has a connection defined.
+        active = DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_ACTIVE
+        for console_port in ConsolePort.objects.prefetch_related('device').filter(device__status=active):
+            if not console_port.connected_endpoints:
+                self.log_failure(
+                    f"No console connection defined for {console_port.name}",
+                    console_port.device,
+                )
+            elif not console_port.connection_status:
+                self.log_warning(
+                    f"Console connection for {console_port.name} marked as planned",
+                    console_port.device,
+                )
+            else:
+                self.log_success("Passed", console_port.device)
+
+    def test_power_connections(self):
+
+        # Check that every active device has at least two connected power supplies.
+        for device in Device.objects.filter(status=DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_ACTIVE):
+            connected_ports = 0
+            for power_port in PowerPort.objects.filter(device=device):
+                if power_port.connected_endpoints:
+                    connected_ports += 1
+                    if not power_port.path.is_active:
+                        self.log_warning(
+                            f"Power connection for {power_port.name} marked as planned",
+                            device,
+                        )
+            if connected_ports < 2:
+                self.log_failure(
+                    f"{connected_ports} connected power supplies found (2 needed)",
+                    device,
+                )
+            else:
+                self.log_success("Passed", device)
+```
+
+## Change Logging
+
+To generate the correct change log data when editing an existing object, a snapshot of the object must be taken before making any changes to the object.
+
+```python
+if obj.pk and hasattr(obj, 'snapshot'):
+    obj.snapshot()
+
+obj.property = "New Value"
+obj.full_clean()
+obj.save()
+```
+
+## Error handling
+
+Sometimes things go wrong and a script will run into an `Exception`. If that happens and an uncaught exception is raised by the custom script, the execution is aborted and a full stack trace is reported.
+
+Although this is helpful for debugging, in some situations it might be required to cleanly abort the execution of a custom script (e.g. because of invalid input data) and thereby make sure no changes are performed on the database. In this case the script can throw an `AbortScript` exception, which will prevent the stack trace from being reported, but still terminating the script's execution and reporting a given error message.
+
+```python
+from utilities.exceptions import AbortScript
+
+if some_error:
+    raise AbortScript("Some meaningful error message")
+```
 
 ## Variable Reference
 
@@ -185,6 +306,7 @@ A particular object within NetBox. Each ObjectVar must specify a particular mode
 
 * `model` - The model class
 * `query_params` - A dictionary of query parameters to use when retrieving available options (optional)
+* `context` - A custom dictionary mapping template context variables to fields, used when rendering `<option>` elements within the dropdown menu (optional; see below)
 * `null_option` - A label representing a "null" or empty choice (optional)
 
 To limit the selections available within the list, additional query parameters can be passed as the `query_params` dictionary. For example, to show only devices with an "active" status:
@@ -212,6 +334,22 @@ site = ObjectVar(
 )
 ```
 
+#### Context Variables
+
+Custom context variables can be passed to override the default attribute names or to display additional information, such as a parent object.
+
+| Name          | Default         | Description                                                                  |
+|---------------|-----------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `value`       | `"id"`          | The attribute which contains the option's value                              |
+| `label`       | `"display"`     | The attribute used as the option's human-friendly label                      |
+| `description` | `"description"` | The attribute to use as a description                                        |
+| `depth`[^1]   | `"_depth"`      | The attribute which indicates an object's depth within a recursive hierarchy |
+| `disabled`    | --              | The attribute which, if true, signifies that the option should be disabled   |
+| `parent`      | --              | The attribute which represents the object's parent object                    |
+| `count`[^1]   | --              | The attribute which contains a numeric count of related objects              |
+
+[^1]: The value of this attribute must be a positive integer
+
 ### MultiObjectVar
 
 Similar to `ObjectVar`, but allows for the selection of multiple objects.
@@ -235,16 +373,24 @@ An IPv4 or IPv6 network with a mask. Returns a `netaddr.IPNetwork` object. Two a
 * `min_prefix_length` - Minimum length of the mask
 * `max_prefix_length` - Maximum length of the mask
 
+### DateVar
+
+A calendar date. Returns a `datetime.date` object.
+
+### DateTimeVar
+
+A complete date & time. Returns a `datetime.datetime` object.
+
 ## Running Custom Scripts
 
 !!! note
-    To run a custom script, a user must be assigned the `extras.run_script` permission. This is achieved by assigning the user (or group) a permission on the Script object and specifying the `run` action in the admin UI as shown below.
+    To run a custom script, a user must be assigned permissions for `Extras > Script`, `Extras > Script Module`, and `Core > Managed File` objects. They must also be assigned the `extras.run_script` permission. This is achieved by assigning the user (or group) a permission on the Script object and specifying the `run` action in "Permissions" as shown below.
 
-    ![Adding the run action to a permission](/media/admin_ui_run_permission.png)
+    ![Adding the run action to a permission](../media/run_permission.png)
 
 ### Via the Web UI
 
-Custom scripts can be run via the web UI by navigating to the script, completing any required form data, and clicking the "run script" button.
+Custom scripts can be run via the web UI by navigating to the script, completing any required form data, and clicking the "run script" button. It is possible to schedule a script to be executed at specified time in the future. A scheduled script can be canceled by deleting the associated job result object.
 
 ### Via the API
 
@@ -259,6 +405,24 @@ http://netbox/api/extras/scripts/example.MyReport/ \
 --data '{"data": {"foo": "somevalue", "bar": 123}, "commit": true}'
 ```
 
+Optionally `schedule_at` can be passed in the form data with a datetime string to schedule a script at the specified date and time.
+
+### Via the CLI
+
+Scripts can be run on the CLI by invoking the management command:
+
+```
+python3 manage.py runscript [--commit] [--loglevel {debug,info,warning,error,critical}] [--data "<data>"] <module>.<script>
+```
+
+The required ``<module>.<script>`` argument is the script to run where ``<module>`` is the name of the python file in the ``scripts`` directory without the ``.py`` extension and ``<script>`` is the name of the script class in the ``<module>`` to run.
+
+The optional ``--data "<data>"`` argument is the data to send to the script
+
+The optional ``--loglevel`` argument is the desired logging level to output to the console.
+
+The optional ``--commit`` argument will commit any changes in the script to the database.
+
 ## Example
 
 Below is an example script that creates new objects for a planned site. The user is prompted for three variables:
@@ -310,6 +474,7 @@ class NewBranchScript(Script):
             slug=slugify(data['site_name']),
             status=SiteStatusChoices.STATUS_PLANNED
         )
+        site.full_clean()
         site.save()
         self.log_success(f"Created new site: {site}")
 
@@ -321,8 +486,9 @@ class NewBranchScript(Script):
                 name=f'{site.slug}-switch{i}',
                 site=site,
                 status=DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_PLANNED,
-                device_role=switch_role
+                role=switch_role
             )
+            switch.full_clean()
             switch.save()
             self.log_success(f"Created new switch: {switch}")
 

docs/customization/custom-validation.md

@@ -1,26 +1,24 @@
 # Custom Validation
 
-NetBox validates every object prior to it being written to the database to ensure data integrity. This validation includes things like checking for proper formatting and that references to related objects are valid. However, you may wish to supplement this validation with some rules of your own. For example, perhaps you require that every site's name conforms to a specific pattern.  This can be done using NetBox's `CustomValidator` class.
+NetBox validates every object prior to it being written to the database to ensure data integrity. This validation includes things like checking for proper formatting and that references to related objects are valid. However, you may wish to supplement this validation with some rules of your own. For example, perhaps you require that every site's name conforms to a specific pattern.  This can be done using custom validation rules.
 
-## CustomValidator
+## Custom Validation Rules
 
-### Validation Rules
+Custom validation rules are expressed as a mapping of object attributes to a set of rules to which that attribute must conform. For example:
 
-A custom validator can be instantiated by passing a mapping of attributes to a set of rules to which that attribute must conform. For example:
-
-```python
-from extras.validators import CustomValidator
-
-CustomValidator({
-    'name': {
-        'min_length': 5,
-        'max_length': 30,
-    }
-})
+```json
+{
+  "name": {
+    "min_length": 5,
+    "max_length": 30
+  }
+}
 ```
 
 This defines a custom validator which checks that the length of the `name` attribute for an object is at least five characters long, and no longer than 30 characters. This validation is executed _after_ NetBox has performed its own internal validation.
 
+### Validation Types
+
 The `CustomValidator` class supports several validation types:
 
 * `min`: Minimum value
@@ -30,6 +28,8 @@ The `CustomValidator` class supports several validation types:
 * `regex`: Application of a [regular expression](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression)
 * `required`: A value must be specified
 * `prohibited`: A value must _not_ be specified
+* `eq`: A value must be equal to the specified value
+* `neq`: A value must _not_ be equal to the specified value
 
 The `min` and `max` types should be defined for numeric values, whereas `min_length`, `max_length`, and `regex` are suitable for character strings (text values). The `required` and `prohibited` validators may be used for any field, and should be passed a value of `True`.
 
@@ -38,13 +38,14 @@ The `min` and `max` types should be defined for numeric values, whereas `min_len
 
 ### Custom Validation Logic
 
-There may be instances where the provided validation types are insufficient. The `CustomValidator` class can be extended to enforce arbitrary validation logic by overriding its `validate()` method, and calling `fail()` when an unsatisfactory condition is detected.
+There may be instances where the provided validation types are insufficient. NetBox provides a `CustomValidator` class which can be extended to enforce arbitrary validation logic by overriding its `validate()` method, and calling `fail()` when an unsatisfactory condition is detected. The `validate()` method should accept an instance (the object being saved) as well as the current request effecting the change.
 
 ```python
 from extras.validators import CustomValidator
 
 class MyValidator(CustomValidator):
-    def validate(self, instance):
+
+    def validate(self, instance, request):
         if instance.status == 'active' and not instance.description:
             self.fail("Active sites must have a description set!", field='status')
 ```
@@ -53,34 +54,100 @@ The `fail()` method may optionally specify a field with which to associate the s
 
 ## Assigning Custom Validators
 
-Custom validators are associated with specific NetBox models under the [CUSTOM_VALIDATORS](../configuration/optional-settings.md#custom_validators) configuration parameter, as such:
+Custom validators are associated with specific NetBox models under the [CUSTOM_VALIDATORS](../configuration/data-validation.md#custom_validators) configuration parameter. There are three manners by which custom validation rules can be defined:
+
+1. Plain JSON mapping (no custom logic)
+2. Dotted path to a custom validator class
+3. Direct reference to a custom validator class
+
+### Plain Data
+
+For cases where custom logic is not needed, it is sufficient to pass validation rules as plain JSON-compatible objects. This approach typically affords the most portability for your configuration. For instance:
+
+```python
+CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
+    "dcim.site": [
+        {
+            "name": {
+                "min_length": 5,
+                "max_length": 30,
+            }
+        }
+    ],
+    "dcim.device": [
+        {
+            "platform": {
+                "required": True,
+            }
+        }
+    ]
+}
+```
+
+#### Referencing Related Object Attributes
+
+The attributes of a related object can be referenced by specifying a dotted path. For example, to reference the name of a region to which a site is assigned, use `region.name`:
+
+```python
+CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
+    "dcim.site": [
+        {
+            "region.name": {
+                "neq": "New York"
+            }
+        }
+    ]
+}
+```
+
+#### Validating Request Parameters
+
+In addition to validating object attributes, custom validators can also match against parameters of the current request (where available). For example, the following rule will permit only the user named "admin" to modify an object:
+
+```json
+{
+  "request.user.username": {
+    "eq": "admin"
+  }
+}
+```
+
+!!! tip
+    Custom validation should generally not be used to enforce permissions. NetBox provides a robust [object-based permissions](../administration/permissions.md) mechanism which should be used for this purpose.
+
+### Dotted Path to Class
+
+In instances where a custom validator class is needed, it can be referenced by its Python path (relative to NetBox's working directory):
 
 ```python
 CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
     'dcim.site': (
-        Validator1,
-        Validator2,
-        Validator3
+        'my_validators.Validator1',
+        'my_validators.Validator2',
+    ),
+    'dcim.device': (
+        'my_validators.Validator3',
+    )
+}
+```
+
+### Direct Class Reference
+
+This approach requires each class being instantiated to be imported directly within the Python configuration file.
+
+```python
+from my_validators import Validator1, Validator2, Validator3
+
+CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
+    'dcim.site': (
+        Validator1(),
+        Validator2(),
+    ),
+    'dcim.device': (
+        Validator3(),
     )
 }
 ```
 
 !!! note
     Even if defining only a single validator, it must be passed as an iterable.
-
-When it is not necessary to define a custom `validate()` method, you may opt to pass a `CustomValidator` instance directly:
-
-```python
-from extras.validators import CustomValidator
-
-CUSTOM_VALIDATORS = {
-    'dcim.site': (
-        CustomValidator({
-            'name': {
-                'min_length': 5,
-                'max_length': 30,
-            }
-        }),
-    )
-}
-```

docs/customization/export-templates.md

@@ -1,8 +1,45 @@
-{!models/extras/exporttemplate.md!}
+# Export Templates
+
+NetBox allows users to define custom templates that can be used when exporting objects. To create an export template, navigate to Customization > Export Templates.
+
+Each export template is associated with a certain type of object. For instance, if you create an export template for VLANs, your custom template will appear under the "Export" button on the VLANs list. Each export template must have a name, and may optionally designate a specific export [MIME type](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Basics_of_HTTP/MIME_types) and/or file extension.
+
+Export templates must be written in [Jinja2](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/).
+
+!!! note
+    The name `table` is reserved for internal use.
+
+!!! warning
+    Export templates are rendered using user-submitted code, which may pose security risks under certain conditions. Only grant permission to create or modify export templates to trusted users.
+
+The list of objects returned from the database when rendering an export template is stored in the `queryset` variable, which you'll typically want to iterate through using a `for` loop. Object properties can be access by name. For example:
+
+```jinja2
+{% for rack in queryset %}
+Rack: {{ rack.name }}
+Site: {{ rack.site.name }}
+Height: {{ rack.u_height }}U
+{% endfor %}
+```
+
+To access custom fields of an object within a template, use the `cf` attribute. For example, `{{ obj.cf.color }}` will return the value (if any) for a custom field named `color` on `obj`.
+
+If you need to use the config context data in an export template, you'll should use the function `get_config_context` to get all the config context data. For example:
+```
+{% for server in queryset %}
+{% set data = server.get_config_context() %}
+{{ data.syslog }}
+{% endfor %}
+```
+
+The `as_attachment` attribute of an export template controls its behavior when rendered. If true, the rendered content will be returned to the user as a downloadable file. If false, it will be displayed within the browser. (This may be handy e.g. for generating HTML content.)
+
+A MIME type and file extension can optionally be defined for each export template. The default MIME type is `text/plain`.
+
 
 ## REST API Integration
 
-When it is necessary to provide authentication credentials (such as when [`LOGIN_REQUIRED`](../configuration/optional-settings.md#login_required) has been enabled), it is recommended to render export templates via the REST API. This allows the client to specify an authentication token. To render an export template via the REST API, make a `GET` request to the model's list endpoint and append the `export` parameter specifying the export template name. For example:
+When it is necessary to provide authentication credentials (such as when [`LOGIN_REQUIRED`](../configuration/security.md#login_required) has been enabled), it is recommended to render export templates via the REST API. This allows the client to specify an authentication token. To render an export template via the REST API, make a `GET` request to the model's list endpoint and append the `export` parameter specifying the export template name. For example:
 
 ```
 GET /api/dcim/sites/?export=MyTemplateName

docs/customization/reports.md

@@ -1,149 +1,63 @@
 # NetBox Reports
 
-A NetBox report is a mechanism for validating the integrity of data within NetBox. Running a report allows the user to verify that the objects defined within NetBox meet certain arbitrary conditions. For example, you can write reports to check that:
-
-* All top-of-rack switches have a console connection
-* Every router has a loopback interface with an IP address assigned
-* Each interface description conforms to a standard format
-* Every site has a minimum set of VLANs defined
-* All IP addresses have a parent prefix
-
-...and so on. Reports are completely customizable, so there's practically no limit to what you can test for.
-
-## Writing Reports
-
-Reports must be saved as files in the [`REPORTS_ROOT`](../configuration/optional-settings.md#reports_root) path (which defaults to `netbox/reports/`). Each file created within this path is considered a separate module. Each module holds one or more reports (Python classes), each of which performs a certain function. The logic of each report is broken into discrete test methods, each of which applies a small portion of the logic comprising the overall test.
-
 !!! warning
-    The reports path includes a file named `__init__.py`, which registers the path as a Python module. Do not delete this file.
+    Reports are deprecated beginning with NetBox v4.0, and their functionality has been merged with [custom scripts](./custom-scripts.md). While backward compatibility has been maintained, users are advised to convert legacy reports into custom scripts soon, as support for legacy reports will be removed in a future release.
 
-For example, we can create a module named `devices.py` to hold all of our reports which pertain to devices in NetBox. Within that module, we might define several reports. Each report is defined as a Python class inheriting from `extras.reports.Report`.
+## Converting Reports to Scripts
 
-```
+### Step 1: Update Class Definition
+
+Change the parent class from `Report` to `Script`:
+
+```python title="Old code"
 from extras.reports import Report
 
-class DeviceConnectionsReport(Report):
-    description = "Validate the minimum physical connections for each device"
-
-class DeviceIPsReport(Report):
-    description = "Check that every device has a primary IP address assigned"
+class MyReport(Report):
 ```
 
-Within each report class, we'll create a number of test methods to execute our report's logic. In DeviceConnectionsReport, for instance, we want to ensure that every live device has a console connection, an out-of-band management connection, and two power connections.
+```python title="New code"
+from extras.scripts import Script
 
-```
-from dcim.choices import DeviceStatusChoices
-from dcim.models import ConsolePort, Device, PowerPort
-from extras.reports import Report
-
-
-class DeviceConnectionsReport(Report):
-    description = "Validate the minimum physical connections for each device"
-
-    def test_console_connection(self):
-
-        # Check that every console port for every active device has a connection defined.
-        active = DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_ACTIVE
-        for console_port in ConsolePort.objects.prefetch_related('device').filter(device__status=active):
-            if console_port.connected_endpoint is None:
-                self.log_failure(
-                    console_port.device,
-                    "No console connection defined for {}".format(console_port.name)
-                )
-            elif not console_port.connection_status:
-                self.log_warning(
-                    console_port.device,
-                    "Console connection for {} marked as planned".format(console_port.name)
-                )
-            else:
-                self.log_success(console_port.device)
-
-    def test_power_connections(self):
-
-        # Check that every active device has at least two connected power supplies.
-        for device in Device.objects.filter(status=DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_ACTIVE):
-            connected_ports = 0
-            for power_port in PowerPort.objects.filter(device=device):
-                if power_port.connected_endpoint is not None:
-                    connected_ports += 1
-                    if not power_port.path.is_active:
-                        self.log_warning(
-                            device,
-                            "Power connection for {} marked as planned".format(power_port.name)
-                        )
-            if connected_ports < 2:
-                self.log_failure(
-                    device,
-                    "{} connected power supplies found (2 needed)".format(connected_ports)
-                )
-            else:
-                self.log_success(device)
+class MyReport(Script):
 ```
 
-As you can see, reports are completely customizable. Validation logic can be as simple or as complex as needed. Also note that the `description` attribute support markdown syntax. It will be rendered in the report list page.
+### Step 2: Update Logging Calls
 
-!!! warning
-    Reports should never alter data: If you find yourself using the `create()`, `save()`, `update()`, or `delete()` methods on objects within reports, stop and re-evaluate what you're trying to accomplish. Note that there are no safeguards against the accidental alteration or destruction of data.
+Reports and scripts both provide logging methods, however their signatures differ. All script logging methods accept a message as the first parameter, and accept an object as an optional second parameter.
 
-The following methods are available to log results within a report:
+Additionally, the Report class' generic `log()` method is **not** available on Script. Users are advised to replace calls of this method with `log_info()`.
 
-* log(message)
-* log_success(object, message=None)
-* log_info(object, message)
-* log_warning(object, message)
-* log_failure(object, message)
+Use the table below as a reference when updating these methods.
 
-The recording of one or more failure messages will automatically flag a report as failed. It is advised to log a success for each object that is evaluated so that the results will reflect how many objects are being reported on. (The inclusion of a log message is optional for successes.) Messages recorded with `log()` will appear in a report's results but are not associated with a particular object or status. Log messages also support using markdown syntax and will be rendered on the report result page.
+| Report (old)                  | Script (New)                |
+|-------------------------------|-----------------------------|
+| `log(message)`                | `log_info(message)`         |
+| `log_debug(obj, message)`[^1] | `log_debug(message, obj)`   |
+| `log_info(obj, message)`      | `log_info(message, obj)`    |
+| `log_success(obj, message)`   | `log_success(message, obj)` |
+| `log_warning(obj, message)`   | `log_warning(message, obj)` |
+| `log_failure(obj, message)`   | `log_failure(message, obj)` |
 
-To perform additional tasks, such as sending an email or calling a webhook, after a report has been run, extend the `post_run()` method. The status of the report is available as `self.failed` and the results object is `self.result`.
+[^1]: `log_debug()` was added to the Report class in v4.0 to avoid confusion with the same method on Script
 
-By default, reports within a module are ordered alphabetically in the reports list page. To return reports in a specific order, you can define the `report_order` variable at the end of your module. The `report_order` variable is a tuple which contains each Report class in the desired order. Any reports that are omitted from this list will be listed last.
-
-```
-from extras.reports import Report
-
-class DeviceConnectionsReport(Report)
-    pass
-
-class DeviceIPsReport(Report)
-    pass
-
-report_order = (DeviceIPsReport, DeviceConnectionsReport)
+```python title="Old code"
+self.log_failure(
+    console_port.device,
+    f"No console connection defined for {console_port.name}"
+)
 ```
 
-Once you have created a report, it will appear in the reports list. Initially, reports will have no results associated with them. To generate results, run the report.
-
-## Running Reports
-
-!!! note
-    To run a report, a user must be assigned the `extras.run_report` permission. This is achieved by assigning the user (or group) a permission on the Report object and specifying the `run` action in the admin UI as shown below.
-
-    ![Adding the run action to a permission](/media/admin_ui_run_permission.png)
-
-### Via the Web UI
-
-Reports can be run via the web UI by navigating to the report and clicking the "run report" button at top right. Once a report has been run, its associated results will be included in the report view.
-
-### Via the API
-
-To run a report via the API, simply issue a POST request to its `run` endpoint. Reports are identified by their module and class name.
-
-```
-    POST /api/extras/reports/<module>.<name>/run/
+```python title="New code"
+self.log_failure(
+    f"No console connection defined for {console_port.name}",
+    obj=console_port.device,
+)
 ```
 
-Our example report above would be called as:
+### Other Notes
 
-```
-    POST /api/extras/reports/devices.DeviceConnectionsReport/run/
-```
+Existing reports will be converted to scripts automatically upon upgrading to NetBox v4.0, and previous job history will be retained. However, users are advised to convert legacy reports into custom scripts at the earliest opportunity, as support for legacy reports will be removed in a future release.
 
-### Via the CLI
+The `pre_run()` and `post_run()` Report methods have been carried over to Script. These are called automatically by Script's `run()` method. (Note that if you opt to override this method, you are responsible for calling `pre_run()` and `post_run()` where applicable.)
 
-Reports can be run on the CLI by invoking the management command:
-
-```
-python3 manage.py runreport <module>
-```
-
-where ``<module>`` is the name of the python file in the ``reports`` directory without the ``.py`` extension.  One or more report modules may be specified.
+The `is_valid()` method on Report is no longer needed and has been removed.

docs/development/adding-models.md

@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@
 
 ## 1. Define the model class
 
-Models within each app are stored in either `models.py` or within a submodule under the `models/` directory. When creating a model, be sure to subclass the [appropriate base model](models.md) from `netbox.models`. This will typically be PrimaryModel or OrganizationalModel. Remember to add the model class to the `__all__` listing for the module.
+Models within each app are stored in either `models.py` or within a submodule under the `models/` directory. When creating a model, be sure to subclass the [appropriate base model](models.md) from `netbox.models`. This will typically be NetBoxModel or OrganizationalModel. Remember to add the model class to the `__all__` listing for the module.
 
 Each model should define, at a minimum:
 
-* A `__str__()` method returning a user-friendly string representation of the instance
-* A `get_absolute_url()` method returning an instance's direct URL (using `reverse()`)
 * A `Meta` class specifying a deterministic ordering (if ordered by fields other than the primary ID)
+* A `__str__()` method returning a user-friendly string representation of the instance
+* A `get_absolute_url()` method if necessary; a standard version of the method is defined in the `NetBoxFeatureSet` base class, but you will need to provide your own (returning an instance's direct URL using `reverse()`) if not subclassing that base class
 
 ## 2. Define field choices
 
@@ -16,9 +16,9 @@ If the model has one or more fields with static choices, define those choices in
 
 ## 3. Generate database migrations
 
-Once your model definition is complete, generate database migrations by running `manage.py -n $NAME --no-header`. Always specify a short unique name when generating migrations.
+Once your model definition is complete, generate database migrations by running `manage.py makemigrations -n $NAME --no-header`. Always specify a short unique name when generating migrations.
 
-!!! info
+!!! info "Configuration Required"
     Set `DEVELOPER = True` in your NetBox configuration to enable the creation of new migrations.
 
 ## 4. Add all standard views
@@ -37,40 +37,52 @@ Most models will need view classes created in `views.py` to serve the following
 
 Add the relevant URL path for each view created in the previous step to `urls.py`.
 
-## 6. Create the FilterSet
+## 6. Add relevant forms
+
+Depending on the type of model being added, you may need to define several types of form classes. These include:
+
+* A base model form (for creating/editing individual objects)
+* A bulk edit form
+* A bulk import form (for CSV-based import)
+* A filterset form (for filtering the object list view)
+
+## 7. Create the FilterSet
 
 Each model should have a corresponding FilterSet class defined. This is used to filter UI and API queries. Subclass the appropriate class from `netbox.filtersets` that matches the model's parent class.
 
-Every model FilterSet should define a `q` filter to support general search queries.
-
-## 7. Create the table
+## 8. Create the table class
 
 Create a table class for the model in `tables.py` by subclassing `utilities.tables.BaseTable`. Under the table's `Meta` class, be sure to list both the fields and default columns.
 
-## 8. Create the object template
+## 9. Create a SearchIndex subclass
+
+If this model will be included in global search results, create a subclass of `netbox.search.SearchIndex` for it and specify the fields to be indexed.
+
+## 10. Create the object template
 
 Create the HTML template for the object view. (The other views each typically employ a generic template.) This template should extend `generic/object.html`.
 
-## 9. Add the model to the navigation menu
+## 11. Add the model to the navigation menu
 
-For NetBox releases prior to v3.0, add the relevant link(s) to the navigation menu template. For later releases, add the relevant items in `netbox/netbox/navigation_menu.py`.
+Add the relevant navigation menu items in `netbox/netbox/navigation/menu.py`.
 
-## 10. REST API components
+## 12. REST API components
 
 Create the following for each model:
 
 * Detailed (full) model serializer in `api/serializers.py`
-* Nested serializer in `api/nested_serializers.py`
 * API view in `api/views.py`
 * Endpoint route in `api/urls.py`
 
-## 11. GraphQL API components (v3.0+)
+## 13. GraphQL API components
 
-Create a Graphene object type for the model in `graphql/types.py` by subclassing the appropriate class from `netbox.graphql.types`.
+Create a GraphQL object type for the model in `graphql/types.py` by subclassing the appropriate class from `netbox.graphql.types`.
+
+**Note:** GraphQL unit tests may fail citing null values on a non-nullable field if related objects are prefetched. You may need to fix this by setting the type annotation to be `= strawberry_django.field(select_related=["policy"])` or similar.
 
 Also extend the schema class defined in `graphql/schema.py` with the individual object and object list fields per the established convention.
 
-## 12. Add tests
+## 14. Add tests
 
 Add tests for the following:
 
@@ -78,7 +90,7 @@ Add tests for the following:
 * API views
 * Filter sets
 
-## 13. Documentation
+## 15. Documentation
 
 Create a new documentation page for the model in `docs/models/<app_label>/<model_name>.md`. Include this file under the "features" documentation where appropriate.
 

docs/development/application-registry.md

@@ -8,6 +8,18 @@ The registry can be inspected by importing `registry` from `extras.registry`.
 
 ## Stores
 
+### `counter_fields`
+
+A dictionary mapping of models to foreign keys with which cached counter fields are associated.
+
+### `data_backends`
+
+A dictionary mapping data backend types to their respective classes. These are used to interact with [remote data sources](../models/core/datasource.md).
+
+### `denormalized_fields`
+
+Stores registration made using `netbox.denormalized.register()`. For each model, a list of related models and their field mappings is maintained to facilitate automatic updates.
+
 ### `model_features`
 
 A dictionary of particular features (e.g. custom fields) mapped to the NetBox models which support them, arranged by app. For example:
@@ -19,39 +31,36 @@ A dictionary of particular features (e.g. custom fields) mapped to the NetBox mo
         'dcim': ['site', 'rack', 'devicetype', ...],
         ...
     },
-    'webhooks': {
-        ...
+    'event_rules': {
+        'extras': ['configcontext', 'tag', ...],
+        'dcim': ['site', 'rack', 'devicetype', ...],
     },
     ...
 }
 ```
 
-### `plugin_menu_items`
+Supported model features are listed in the [features matrix](./models.md#features-matrix).
 
-Navigation menu items provided by NetBox plugins. Each plugin is registered as a key with the list of menu items it provides. An example:
+### `models`
 
-```python
-{
-    'Plugin A': (
-        <MenuItem>, <MenuItem>, <MenuItem>,
-    ),
-    'Plugin B': (
-        <MenuItem>, <MenuItem>, <MenuItem>,
-    ),
-}
-```
+This key lists all models which have been registered in NetBox which are not designated for private use. (Setting `_netbox_private` to True on a model excludes it from this list.) As with individual features under `model_features`, models are organized by app label.
 
-### `plugin_template_extensions`
+### `plugins`
 
-Plugin content that gets embedded into core NetBox templates. The store comprises NetBox models registered as dictionary keys, each pointing to a list of applicable template extension classes that exist. An example:
+This store maintains all registered items for plugins, such as navigation menus, template extensions, etc.
 
-```python
-{
-    'dcim.site': [
-        <TemplateExtension>, <TemplateExtension>, <TemplateExtension>,
-    ],
-    'dcim.rack': [
-        <TemplateExtension>, <TemplateExtension>,
-    ],
-}
-```
+### `request_processors`
+
+A list of context managers to invoke when processing a request e.g. in middleware or when executing a background job. Request processors can be registered with the `@register_request_processor` decorator.
+
+### `search`
+
+A dictionary mapping each model (identified by its app and label) to its search index class, if one has been registered for it.
+
+### `tables`
+
+A dictionary mapping table classes to lists of extra columns that have been registered by plugins using the `register_table_column()` utility function. Each column is defined as a tuple of name and column instance.
+
+### `views`
+
+A hierarchical mapping of registered views for each model. Mappings are added using the `register_model_view()` decorator, and URLs paths can be generated from these using `get_model_urls()`.

docs/development/extending-models.md

@@ -2,21 +2,34 @@
 
 Below is a list of tasks to consider when adding a new field to a core model.
 
-## 1. Generate and run database migrations
+## 1. Add the field to the model class
 
-Django migrations are used to express changes to the database schema. In most cases, Django can generate these automatically, however very complex changes may require manual intervention. Always remember to specify a short but descriptive name when generating a new migration.
+Add the field to the model, taking care to address any of the following conditions.
+
+* When adding a GenericForeignKey field, also add an index under `Meta` for its two concrete fields. For example:
+
+    ```python
+    class Meta:
+        indexes = (
+            models.Index(fields=('object_type', 'object_id')),
+        )
+    ```
+
+## 2. Generate and run database migrations
+
+[Django migrations](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/migrations/) are used to express changes to the database schema. In most cases, Django can generate these automatically, however very complex changes may require manual intervention. Always remember to specify a short but descriptive name when generating a new migration.
 
 ```
-./manage.py makemigrations <app> -n <name>
+./manage.py makemigrations <app> -n <name> --no-header
 ./manage.py migrate
 ```
 
-Where possible, try to merge related changes into a single migration. For example, if three new fields are being added to different models within an app, these can be expressed in the same migration. You can merge a new migration with an existing one by combining their `operations` lists.
+Where possible, try to merge related changes into a single migration. For example, if three new fields are being added to different models within an app, these can be expressed in a single migration. You can merge a newly generated migration with an existing one by combining their `operations` lists.
 
-!!! note
+!!! warning "Do not alter existing migrations"
     Migrations can only be merged within a release. Once a new release has been published, its migrations cannot be altered (other than for the purpose of correcting a bug).
 
-## 2. Add validation logic to `clean()`
+## 3. Add validation logic to `clean()`
 
 If the new field introduces additional validation requirements (beyond what's included with the field itself), implement them in the model's `clean()` method. Remember to call the model's original method using `super()` before or after your custom validation as appropriate:
 
@@ -24,7 +37,6 @@ If the new field introduces additional validation requirements (beyond what's in
 class Foo(models.Model):
 
     def clean(self):
-
         super().clean()
 
         # Custom validation goes here
@@ -32,36 +44,40 @@ class Foo(models.Model):
             raise ValidationError()
 ```
 
-## 3. Update relevant querysets
+## 4. Update relevant querysets
 
 If you're adding a relational field (e.g. `ForeignKey`) and intend to include the data when retrieving a list of objects, be sure to include the field using `prefetch_related()` as appropriate. This will optimize the view and avoid extraneous database queries.
 
-## 4. Update API serializer
+## 5. Update API serializer
 
-Extend the model's API serializer in `<app>.api.serializers` to include the new field. In most cases, it will not be necessary to also extend the nested serializer, which produces a minimal representation of the model.
+Extend the model's API serializer in `<app>.api.serializers` to include the new field.
 
-## 5. Add field to forms
+## 6. Add fields to forms
 
-Extend any forms to include the new field as appropriate. Common forms include:
+Extend any forms to include the new field(s) as appropriate. These are found under the `forms/` directory within each app. Common forms include:
 
 * **Credit/edit** - Manipulating a single object
 * **Bulk edit** - Performing a change on many objects at once
 * **CSV import** - The form used when bulk importing objects in CSV format
 * **Filter** - Displays the options available for filtering a list of objects (both UI and API)
 
-## 6. Extend object filter set
+## 7. Extend object filter set
 
-If the new field should be filterable, add it to the `FilterSet` for the model. If the field should be searchable, remember to reference it in the FilterSet's `search()` method.
+If the new field should be filterable, add it to the `FilterSet` for the model. If the field should be searchable, remember to query it in the FilterSet's `search()` method.
 
-## 7. Add column to object table
+## 8. Add column to object table
 
-If the new field will be included in the object list view, add a column to the model's table. For simple fields, adding the field name to `Meta.fields` will be sufficient. More complex fields may require declaring a custom column.
+If the new field will be included in the object list view, add a column to the model's table. For simple fields, adding the field name to `Meta.fields` will be sufficient. More complex fields may require declaring a custom column. Also add the field name to `default_columns` if the column should be present in the table by default.
 
-## 8. Update the UI templates
+## 9. Update the SearchIndex
+
+Where applicable, add the new field to the model's SearchIndex for inclusion in global search.
+
+## 10. Update the UI templates
 
 Edit the object's view template to display the new field. There may also be a custom add/edit form template that needs to be updated.
 
-## 9. Create/extend test cases
+## 11. Create/extend test cases
 
 Create or extend the relevant test cases to verify that the new field and any accompanying validation logic perform as expected. This is especially important for relational fields. NetBox incorporates various test suites, including:
 
@@ -71,8 +87,8 @@ Create or extend the relevant test cases to verify that the new field and any ac
 * Model tests
 * View tests
 
-Be diligent to ensure all of the relevant test suites are adapted or extended as necessary to test any new functionality.
+Be diligent to ensure all the relevant test suites are adapted or extended as necessary to test any new functionality.
 
-## 10. Update the model's documentation
+## 12. Update the model's documentation
 
 Each model has a dedicated page in the documentation, at `models/<app>/<model>.md`. Update this file to include any relevant information about the new field.

docs/development/getting-started.md

@@ -4,137 +4,200 @@
 
 Getting started with NetBox development is pretty straightforward, and should feel very familiar to anyone with Django development experience. There are a few things you'll need:
 
-* A Linux system or environment
+* A Linux system or compatible environment
 * A PostgreSQL server, which can be installed locally [per the documentation](../installation/1-postgresql.md)
 * A Redis server, which can also be [installed locally](../installation/2-redis.md)
-* A supported version of Python
+* Python 3.10 or later
 
-### Fork the Repo
+### 1. Fork the Repo
 
-Assuming you'll be working on your own fork, your first step will be to fork the [official git repository](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox). (If you're a maintainer who's going to be working directly with the official repo, skip this step.) You can then clone your GitHub fork locally for development:
+Assuming you'll be working on your own fork, your first step will be to fork the [official git repository](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox). (If you're a maintainer who's going to be working directly with the official repo, skip this step.) Click the "fork" button at top right (be sure that you've logged into GitHub first).
 
-```no-highlight
-$ git clone https://github.com/youruseraccount/netbox.git
+![GitHub fork button](../media/development/github_fork_button.png)
+
+Copy the URL provided in the dialog box.
+
+![GitHub fork dialog](../media/development/github_fork_dialog.png)
+
+You can then clone your GitHub fork locally for development:
+
+```no-highlight hl_lines="1 9"
+$ git clone https://github.com/$username/netbox.git
 Cloning into 'netbox'...
-remote: Enumerating objects: 231, done.
-remote: Counting objects: 100% (231/231), done.
-remote: Compressing objects: 100% (147/147), done.
-remote: Total 56705 (delta 134), reused 145 (delta 84), pack-reused 56474
-Receiving objects: 100% (56705/56705), 27.96 MiB | 34.92 MiB/s, done.
-Resolving deltas: 100% (44177/44177), done.
+remote: Enumerating objects: 85949, done.
+remote: Counting objects: 100% (4672/4672), done.
+remote: Compressing objects: 100% (1224/1224), done.
+remote: Total 85949 (delta 3538), reused 4332 (delta 3438), pack-reused 81277
+Receiving objects: 100% (85949/85949), 55.16 MiB | 44.90 MiB/s, done.
+Resolving deltas: 100% (68008/68008), done.
 $ ls netbox/
 base_requirements.txt  contrib          docs         mkdocs.yml  NOTICE     requirements.txt  upgrade.sh
 CHANGELOG.md           CONTRIBUTING.md  LICENSE.txt  netbox      README.md  scripts
 ```
 
-The NetBox project utilizes three persistent git branches to track work:
+### 2. Create a New Branch
 
-* `master` - Serves as a snapshot of the current stable release
-* `develop` - All development on the upcoming stable release occurs here
-* `feature` - Tracks work on an upcoming major release
+The NetBox project utilizes two persistent git branches to track work:
 
-Typically, you'll base pull requests off of the `develop` branch, or off of `feature` if you're working on a new major release. **Never** merge pull requests into the `master` branch, which receives merged only from the `develop` branch.
+* `main` - All development on the upcoming stable (patch) release occurs here. Releases are published from this branch.
+* `feature` - All work planned for the upcoming minor release is done here.
 
-### Enable Pre-Commit Hooks
+Typically, you'll base pull requests off of the `main` branch, or off of `feature` if you're working on the upcoming minor or major release. For example, assume that the current NetBox release is v4.2.3. Work applied to the `main` branch will appear in v4.2.4, and work done under the `feature` branch will be included in the next minor release (v4.3.0).
 
-NetBox ships with a [git pre-commit hook](https://githooks.com/) script that automatically checks for style compliance and missing database migrations prior to committing changes. This helps avoid erroneous commits that result in CI test failures. You are encouraged to enable it by creating a link to `scripts/git-hooks/pre-commit`:
+To create a new branch, first ensure that you've checked out the desired base branch, then run:
 
 ```no-highlight
-$ cd .git/hooks/
-$ ln -s ../../scripts/git-hooks/pre-commit
+git checkout -B $branchname
 ```
 
-### Create a Python Virtual Environment
+When naming a new git branch, contributors are strongly encouraged to use the relevant issue number followed by a very brief description of the work:
 
-A [virtual environment](https://docs.python.org/3/tutorial/venv.html) is like a container for a set of Python packages. They allow you to build environments suited to specific projects without interfering with system packages or other projects. When installed per the documentation, NetBox uses a virtual environment in production.
+```no-highlight
+$issue-$description
+```
+
+The description should be just two or three words to imply the focus of the work being performed. For example, bug #1234 to fix a TypeError exception when creating a device might be named `1234-device-typerror`. This ensures that branches are always follow some logical ordering (e.g. when running `git branch -a`) and helps other developers quickly identify the purpose of each.
+
+### 3. Create a Python Virtual Environment
+
+A [virtual environment](https://docs.python.org/3/tutorial/venv.html) (or "venv" for short) is like a container for a set of Python packages. These allow you to build environments suited to specific projects without interfering with system packages or other projects. When installed per the documentation, NetBox uses a virtual environment in production.
 
 Create a virtual environment using the `venv` Python module:
 
 ```no-highlight
-$ mkdir ~/.venv
-$ python3 -m venv ~/.venv/netbox
+mkdir ~/.venv
+python3 -m venv ~/.venv/netbox
 ```
 
 This will create a directory named `.venv/netbox/` in your home directory, which houses a virtual copy of the Python executable and its related libraries and tooling. When running NetBox for development, it will be run using the Python binary at `~/.venv/netbox/bin/python`.
 
-!!! info
-    Keeping virtual environments in `~/.venv/` is a common convention but entirely optional: Virtual environments can be created wherever you please.
+!!! tip "Virtual Environments"
+    Keeping virtual environments in `~/.venv/` is a common convention but entirely optional: Virtual environments can be created almost wherever you please. Also consider using [`virtualenvwrapper`](https://virtualenvwrapper.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) to simplify the management of multiple environments.
 
 Once created, activate the virtual environment:
 
 ```no-highlight
-$ source ~/.venv/netbox/bin/activate
-(netbox) $ 
+source ~/.venv/netbox/bin/activate
 ```
 
 Notice that the console prompt changes to indicate the active environment. This updates the necessary system environment variables to ensure that any Python scripts are run within the virtual environment.
 
-### Install Dependencies
+### 4. Install Required Packages
 
-With the virtual environment activated, install the project's required Python packages using the `pip` module:
+With the virtual environment activated, install the project's required Python packages using the `pip` module. Required packages are defined in `requirements.txt`. Each line in this file specifies the name and specific version of a required package.
 
 ```no-highlight
-(netbox) $ python -m pip install -r requirements.txt
-Collecting Django==3.1 (from -r requirements.txt (line 1))
-  Cache entry deserialization failed, entry ignored
-  Using cached https://files.pythonhosted.org/packages/2b/5a/4bd5624546912082a1bd2709d0edc0685f5c7827a278d806a20cf6adea28/Django-3.1-py3-none-any.whl
-...
+python -m pip install -r requirements.txt
 ```
 
-### Configure NetBox
+### 5. Install Pre-Commit
 
-Within the `netbox/netbox/` directory, copy `configuration.example.py` to `configuration.py` and update the following parameters:
+NetBox uses [`pre-commit`](https://pre-commit.com/) to automatically validate code when commiting new changes. This includes the following operations:
+
+* Run the `ruff` Python linter
+* Run Django's internal system check
+* Check for missing database migrations
+* Validate any changes to the documentation with `mkdocs`
+* Validate Typescript & Sass styling with `yarn`
+* Ensure that any modified static front end assets have been recompiled
+
+Enable `pre-commit` with the following commands _prior_ to commiting any changes:
+
+```no-highlight
+python -m pip install ruff pre-commit
+pre-commit install
+```
+
+You may also need to set up the yarn packages as shown in the [Web UI Development Guide](web-ui.md).
+
+### 6. Configure NetBox
+
+Within the `netbox/netbox/` directory, copy `configuration_example.py` to `configuration.py` and update the following parameters:
 
 * `ALLOWED_HOSTS`: This can be set to `['*']` for development purposes
 * `DATABASE`: PostgreSQL database connection parameters
-* `REDIS`: Redis configuration, if different from the defaults
+* `REDIS`: Redis configuration (if different from the defaults)
 * `SECRET_KEY`: Set to a random string (use `generate_secret_key.py` in the parent directory to generate a suitable key)
 * `DEBUG`: Set to `True`
 * `DEVELOPER`: Set to `True` (this enables the creation of new database migrations)
 
-### Start the Development Server
+### 7. Start the Development Server
 
-Django provides a lightweight, auto-updating HTTP/WSGI server for development use. NetBox extends this slightly to automatically import models and other utilities. Run the NetBox development server with the `nbshell` management command:
+Django provides a lightweight, auto-updating [HTTP/WSGI server](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/django-admin/#runserver) for development use. It is started with the `runserver` management command:
 
-```no-highlight
-$ python netbox/manage.py runserver
+```no-highlight hl_lines="1"
+$ ./manage.py runserver
 Performing system checks...
 
 System check identified no issues (0 silenced).
-November 18, 2020 - 15:52:31
-Django version 3.1, using settings 'netbox.settings'
+August 18, 2022 - 15:17:52
+Django version 4.0.7, using settings 'netbox.settings'
 Starting development server at http://127.0.0.1:8000/
 Quit the server with CONTROL-C.
 ```
 
-This ensures that your development environment is now complete and operational. Any changes you make to the code base will be automatically adapted by the development server.
+This ensures that your development environment is now complete and operational. The development server will monitor the development environment and automatically reload in response to any changes made.
+
+!!! tip "IDE Integration"
+    Some IDEs, such as the highly-recommended [PyCharm](https://www.jetbrains.com/pycharm/), will integrate with Django's development server and allow you to run it directly within the IDE. This is strongly encouraged as it makes for a much more convenient development environment.
+
+## UI Development
+
+For UI development you will need to review the [Web UI Development Guide](web-ui.md)
+
+## Populating Demo Data
+
+Once you have your development environment up and running, it might be helpful to populate some "dummy" data to make interacting with the UI and APIs more convenient. Check out the [netbox-demo-data](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-demo-data) repo on GitHub, which houses a collection of sample data that can be easily imported to any new NetBox deployment. (This sample data is used to populate the public demo instance at <https://demo.netbox.dev>.)
+
+The demo data is provided in JSON format and loaded into an empty database using Django's `loaddata` management command. Consult the demo data repo's `README` file for complete instructions on populating the data.
 
 ## Running Tests
 
-Throughout the course of development, it's a good idea to occasionally run NetBox's test suite to catch any potential errors. Tests are run using the `test` management command:
+Prior to committing any substantial changes to the code base, be sure to run NetBox's test suite to catch potential errors. Tests are run using the `test` management command, which employs Python's [`unittest`](https://docs.python.org/3/library/unittest.html#module-unittest) library. Remember to ensure that the Python virtual environment is active before running this command. Also keep in mind that these commands are executed in the `netbox/` directory, not the root directory of the repository.
+
+To avoid potential issues with your local configuration file, set the `NETBOX_CONFIGURATION` to point to the packaged test configuration at `netbox/configuration_testing.py`. This will handle things like ensuring that the dummy plugin is enabled for comprehensive testing.
 
 ```no-highlight
-$ python netbox/manage.py test
+export NETBOX_CONFIGURATION=netbox.configuration_testing
+cd netbox/
+python manage.py test
 ```
 
-In cases where you haven't made any changes to the database (which is most of the time), you can append the `--keepdb` argument to this command to reuse the test database between runs. This cuts down on the time it takes to run the test suite since the database doesn't have to be rebuilt each time. (Note that this argument will cause errors if you've modified any model fields since the previous test run.)
+In cases where you haven't made any changes to the database schema (which is typical), you can append the `--keepdb` argument to this command to reuse the test database between runs. This cuts down on the time it takes to run the test suite since the database doesn't have to be rebuilt each time. (Note that this argument will cause errors if you've modified any model fields since the previous test run.)
 
 ```no-highlight
-$ python netbox/manage.py test --keepdb
+python manage.py test --keepdb
 ```
 
+You can also reduce testing time by enabling parallel test execution with the `--parallel` flag. (By default, this will run as many parallel tests as you have processors. To avoid sluggishness, it's a good idea to specify a lower number of parallel tests.) This flag can be combined with `--keepdb`, although if you encounter any strange errors, try running the test suite again with parallelization disabled.
+
+```no-highlight
+python manage.py test --parallel <n>
+```
+
+Finally, it's possible to limit the run to a specific set of tests, specified by their Python path. For example, to run only IPAM and DCIM view tests:
+
+```no-highlight
+python manage.py test dcim.tests.test_views ipam.tests.test_views
+```
+
+This is handy for instances where just a few tests are failing and you want to re-run them individually.
+
+!!! info
+    NetBox uses [django-rich](https://github.com/adamchainz/django-rich) to enhance Django's default `test` management command.
+
 ## Submitting Pull Requests
 
-Once you're happy with your work and have verified that all tests pass, commit your changes and push it upstream to your fork. Always provide descriptive (but not excessively verbose) commit messages. When working on a specific issue, be sure to reference it.
+Once you're happy with your work and have verified that all tests pass, commit your changes and push it upstream to your fork. Always provide descriptive (but not excessively verbose) commit messages. Be sure to prefix your commit message with the word "Fixes" or "Closes" and the relevant issue number (with a hash mark). This tells GitHub to automatically close the referenced issue once the commit has been merged.
 
 ```no-highlight
-$ git commit -m "Closes #1234: Add IPv5 support"
-$ git push origin
+git commit -m "Closes #1234: Add IPv5 support"
+git push origin
 ```
 
 Once your fork has the new commit, submit a [pull request](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/compare) to the NetBox repo to propose the changes. Be sure to provide a detailed accounting of the changes being made and the reasons for doing so.
 
 Once submitted, a maintainer will review your pull request and either merge it or request changes. If changes are needed, you can make them via new commits to your fork: The pull request will update automatically.
 
-!!! note
-    Remember, pull requests are entertained only for **accepted** issues. If an issue you want to work on hasn't been approved by a maintainer yet, it's best to avoid risking your time and effort on a change that might not be accepted.
+!!! warning
+    Remember, pull requests are permitted only for **accepted** issues. If an issue you want to work on hasn't been approved by a maintainer yet, it's best to avoid risking your time and effort on a change that might not be accepted. (The one exception to this is trivial changes to the documentation or other non-critical resources.)

docs/development/git-cheat-sheet.md

@@ -0,0 +1,388 @@
+# git Cheat Sheet
+
+This cheat sheet serves as a convenient reference for NetBox contributors who already somewhat familiar with using git. For a general introduction to the tooling and workflows involved, please see GitHub's guide [Getting started with git](https://docs.github.com/en/get-started/getting-started-with-git/setting-your-username-in-git).
+
+## Common Operations
+
+### Clone a Repo
+
+This copies a remote git repository (e.g. from GitHub) to your local workstation. It will create a new directory bearing the repo's name in the current path.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git clone https://github.com/$org-name/$repo-name
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git clone https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox
+Cloning into 'netbox'...
+remote: Enumerating objects: 95112, done.
+remote: Counting objects: 100% (682/682), done.
+remote: Compressing objects: 100% (246/246), done.
+remote: Total 95112 (delta 448), reused 637 (delta 436), pack-reused 94430
+Receiving objects: 100% (95112/95112), 60.40 MiB | 45.82 MiB/s, done.
+Resolving deltas: 100% (74979/74979), done.
+```
+
+### Pull New Commits
+
+To update your local branch with any recent upstream commits, run `git pull`.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git pull
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git pull
+remote: Enumerating objects: 1, done.
+remote: Counting objects: 100% (1/1), done.
+remote: Total 1 (delta 0), reused 0 (delta 0), pack-reused 0
+Unpacking objects: 100% (1/1), done.
+From https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox
+   28bc76695..e0741cc9a  develop    -> origin/develop
+Updating 28bc76695..e0741cc9a
+Fast-forward
+ docs/release-notes/version-3.3.md | 1 +
+ netbox/netbox/settings.py         | 1 +
+ 2 files changed, 2 insertions(+)
+```
+
+### List Branches
+
+`git branch` lists all local branches. Appending `-a` to this command will list both local (green) and remote (red) branches.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git branch -a
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git branch -a
+* develop
+  remotes/origin/10170-changelog
+  remotes/origin/HEAD -> origin/develop
+  remotes/origin/develop
+  remotes/origin/feature
+  remotes/origin/master
+```
+
+### Switch Branches
+
+To switch to a different branch, use the `checkout` command.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git checkout $branchname
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git checkout feature
+Branch 'feature' set up to track remote branch 'feature' from 'origin'.
+Switched to a new branch 'feature'
+```
+
+### Create a New Branch
+
+Use the `-b` argument with `checkout` to create a new _local_ branch from the current branch.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git checkout -b $newbranch
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git checkout -b 123-fix-foo
+Switched to a new branch '123-fix-foo'
+```
+
+### Rename a Branch
+
+To rename the current branch, use the `git branch` command with the `-m` argument (for "modify").
+
+``` title="Command"
+git branch -m $newname
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git branch -m jstretch-testing
+$ git branch
+  develop
+  feature
+* jstretch-testing
+```
+
+### Merge a Branch
+
+To merge one branch into another, use the `git merge` command. Start by checking out the _destination_ branch, and merge the _source_ branch into it.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git merge $sourcebranch
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git checkout testing 
+Switched to branch 'testing'
+Your branch is up to date with 'origin/testing'.
+$ git merge branch2 
+Updating 9a12b5b5f..8ee42390b
+Fast-forward
+ newfile.py | 0
+ 1 file changed, 0 insertions(+), 0 deletions(-)
+ create mode 100644 newfile.py
+```
+
+!!! warning "Avoid Merging Remote Branches"
+    You generally want to avoid merging branches that exist on the remote (upstream) repository, namely `main` and `feature`: Merges into these branches should be done via a pull request on GitHub. Only merge branches when it is necessary to consolidate work you've done locally.
+
+### Show Pending Changes
+
+After making changes to files in the repo, `git status` will display a summary of created, modified, and deleted files.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git status
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git status
+On branch 123-fix-foo
+Changes not staged for commit:
+  (use "git add <file>..." to update what will be committed)
+  (use "git checkout -- <file>..." to discard changes in working directory)
+
+	modified:   README.md
+
+Untracked files:
+  (use "git add <file>..." to include in what will be committed)
+
+	foo.py
+
+no changes added to commit (use "git add" and/or "git commit -a")
+```
+
+### Stage Changed Files
+
+Before creating a new commit, modified files must be staged. This is typically done with the `git add` command. You can specify a particular path, or just append `-A` to automatically staged _all_ changed files within the current directory. Run `git status` again to verify what files have been staged.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git add -A
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git add -A
+$ git status
+On branch 123-fix-foo
+Changes to be committed:
+  (use "git reset HEAD <file>..." to unstage)
+
+	modified:   README.md
+	new file:   foo.py
+
+```
+
+### Review Staged Files
+
+It's a good idea to thoroughly review all staged changes immediately prior to creating a new commit. This can be done using the `git diff` command. Appending the `--staged` argument will show staged changes; omitting it will show changes that have not yet been staged.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git diff --staged
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git diff --staged
+diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
+index 93e125079..4344fb514 100644
+--- a/README.md
++++ b/README.md
+@@ -1,3 +1,8 @@
++
++Added some lines here
++and here
++and here too
++
+ <div align="center">
+   <img src="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/netbox-community/netbox/main/docs/netbox_logo.svg" width="400" alt="NetBox logo" />
+ </div>
+diff --git a/foo.py b/foo.py
+new file mode 100644
+index 000000000..e69de29bb
+```
+
+### Create a New Commit
+
+The `git commit` command records your changes to the current branch. Specify a commit message with the `-m` argument. (If omitted, a file editor will be opened to provide a message.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git commit -m "Fixes #123: Fixed the thing that was broken"
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git commit -m "Fixes #123: Fixed the thing that was broken"
+[123-fix-foo 9a12b5b5f] Fixes #123: Fixed the thing that was broken
+ 2 files changed, 5 insertions(+)
+ create mode 100644 foo.py
+```
+
+!!! tip "Automatically Closing Issues"
+    GitHub will [automatically close](https://github.blog/2013-01-22-closing-issues-via-commit-messages/) any issues referenced in a commit message by `Fixes:` or `Closes:` when the commit is merged into the repository's default branch. Contributors are strongly encouraged to follow this convention when forming commit messages. (Use "Closes" for feature requests and "Fixes" for bugs.)
+
+### Push a Commit Upstream
+
+Once you've made a commit locally, it needs to be pushed upstream to the _remote_ repository (typically called "origin"). This is done with the `git push` command. If this is a new branch that doesn't yet exist on the remote repository, you'll need to set the upstream for it when pushing.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git push -u origin $branchname
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git push -u origin testing
+Counting objects: 3, done.
+Delta compression using up to 16 threads.
+Compressing objects: 100% (3/3), done.
+Writing objects: 100% (3/3), 377 bytes | 377.00 KiB/s, done.
+Total 3 (delta 2), reused 0 (delta 0)
+remote: Resolving deltas: 100% (2/2), completed with 2 local objects.
+remote: 
+remote: Create a pull request for 'testing' on GitHub by visiting:
+remote:      https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/pull/new/testing
+remote: 
+To https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox
+ * [new branch]          testing -> testing
+Branch 'testing' set up to track remote branch 'testing' from 'origin'.
+```
+
+!!! tip
+    You can apply the following git configuration to automatically set the upstream for all new branches. This obviates the need to specify `-u origin`.
+    
+    ```
+    git config --global push.default current
+    ```
+
+## The GitHub CLI Client
+
+GitHub provides a [free CLI client](https://cli.github.com/) to simplify many aspects of interacting with GitHub repositories. Note that this utility is separate from `git`, and must be [installed separately](https://github.com/cli/cli#installation).
+
+This guide provides some examples of common operations, but be sure to check out the [GitHub CLI manual](https://cli.github.com/manual/) for a complete accounting of available commands.
+
+### List Open Pull Requests
+
+``` title="Command"
+gh pr list
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ gh pr list
+
+Showing 3 of 3 open pull requests in netbox-community/netbox
+
+#10223  #7503 API Bulk-Create of Devices does not check Rack-Space  7503-bulkdevice             about 17 hours ago
+#9716   Closes #9599: Add cursor pagination mode                    lyuyangh:cursor-pagination  about 1 month ago
+#9498   Adds replication and adoption for module import             sleepinggenius2:issue_9361  about 2 months ago
+```
+
+### Check Out a PR
+
+This command will automatically check out the remote branch associated with an open pull request.
+
+``` title="Command"
+gh pr checkout $number
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ gh pr checkout 10223
+Branch '7503-bulkdevice' set up to track remote branch '7503-bulkdevice' from 'origin'.
+Switched to a new branch '7503-bulkdevice'
+```
+
+## Fixing Mistakes
+
+### Modify the Previous Commit
+
+Sometimes you'll find that you've overlooked a necessary change and need to commit again. If you haven't pushed your most recent commit and just need to make a small tweak or two, you can _amend_ your most recent commit instead of creating a new one.
+
+First, stage the desired files with `git add` and verify the changes, the issue the `git commit` command with the `--amend` argument. You can also append the `--no-edit` argument if you would like to keep the previous commit message.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git commit --amend --no-edit
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git add -A
+$ git diff --staged
+$ git commit --amend --no-edit
+[testing 239b16921] Added a new file
+ Date: Fri Aug 26 16:30:05 2022 -0400
+ 2 files changed, 1 insertion(+)
+ create mode 100644 newfile.py
+```
+
+!!! danger "Don't Amend After Pushing"
+    Never amend a commit you've already pushed upstream unless you're **certain** no one else is working on the same branch. Force-pushing will overwrite the change history, which will break any commits from other contributors. When in doubt, create a new commit instead.
+
+### Undo the Last Commit
+
+The `git reset` command can be used to undo the most recent commit. (`HEAD~` is equivalent to `HEAD~1` and references the commit prior to the current HEAD.) After making and staging your changes, commit using `-c ORIG_HEAD` to replace the erroneous commit.
+
+``` title="Command"
+git reset HEAD~
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git add -A
+$ git commit -m "Erroneous commit"
+[testing 09ce06736] Erroneous commit
+ Date: Mon Aug 29 15:20:04 2022 -0400
+ 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)
+ create mode 100644 BADCHANGE
+$ git reset HEAD~
+$ rm BADFILE
+$ git add -A
+$ git commit -m "Fixed commit"
+[testing c585709f3] Fixed commit
+ Date: Mon Aug 29 15:22:38 2022 -0400
+ 1 file changed, 65 insertions(+), 20 deletions(-)
+```
+
+!!! danger "Don't Reset After Pushing"
+    Resetting only works until you've pushed your local changes upstream. If you've already pushed upstream, use `git revert` instead. This will create a _new_ commit that reverts the erroneous one, but ensures that the git history remains intact.
+
+### Rebase from Upstream
+
+If a change has been pushed to the upstream branch since you most recently pulled it, attempting to push a new local commit will fail:
+
+```
+$ git push
+To https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox.git
+ ! [rejected]            develop -> develop (fetch first)
+error: failed to push some refs to 'https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox.git'
+hint: Updates were rejected because the remote contains work that you do
+hint: not have locally. This is usually caused by another repository pushing
+hint: to the same ref. You may want to first integrate the remote changes
+hint: (e.g., 'git pull ...') before pushing again.
+hint: See the 'Note about fast-forwards' in 'git push --help' for details.
+```
+
+To resolve this, first fetch the upstream branch to update your local copy, and then [rebase](https://git-scm.com/book/en/v2/Git-Branching-Rebasing) your local branch to include the new changes. Once the rebase has completed, you can push your local commits upstream.
+
+``` title="Commands"
+git fetch
+git rebase origin/$branchname
+```
+
+``` title="Example"
+$ git fetch
+remote: Enumerating objects: 1, done.
+remote: Counting objects: 100% (1/1), done.
+remote: Total 1 (delta 0), reused 0 (delta 0), pack-reused 0
+Unpacking objects: 100% (1/1), done.
+From https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox
+   815b2d8a2..8c35ebbb7  develop    -> origin/develop
+$ git rebase origin/develop
+First, rewinding head to replay your work on top of it...
+Applying: Further tweaks to the PR template
+Applying: Changelog for #10176, #10217
+$ git push
+Counting objects: 9, done.
+Delta compression using up to 16 threads.
+Compressing objects: 100% (9/9), done.
+Writing objects: 100% (9/9), 1.02 KiB | 1.02 MiB/s, done.
+Total 9 (delta 6), reused 0 (delta 0)
+remote: Resolving deltas: 100% (6/6), completed with 5 local objects.
+To https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox.git
+   8c35ebbb7..ada745324  develop -> develop
+```

docs/development/index.md

@@ -1,25 +1,19 @@
 # NetBox Development
 
-NetBox is maintained as a [GitHub project](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox) under the Apache 2 license. Users are encouraged to submit GitHub issues for feature requests and bug reports, however we are very selective about pull requests. Please see the `CONTRIBUTING` guide for more direction on contributing to NetBox.
+Thanks for your interest in contributing to NetBox! This introduction covers a few important things to know before you get started.
 
-## Communication
+## The Code
 
-There are several official forums for communication among the developers and community members:
+NetBox and many of its related projects are maintained on [GitHub](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox). GitHub also serves as one of our primary discussion forums. While all the code and discussion is publicly accessible, you'll need register for a [free GitHub account](https://github.com/signup) to engage in participation. Most people begin by [forking](https://docs.github.com/en/get-started/quickstart/fork-a-repo) the NetBox repository under their own GitHub account to begin working on the code.
 
-* [GitHub issues](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues) - All feature requests, bug reports, and other substantial changes to the code base **must** be documented in an issue.
-* [GitHub Discussions](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) - The preferred forum for general discussion and support issues. Ideal for shaping a feature request prior to submitting an issue.
-* [#netbox on NetDev Community Slack](https://netdev.chat/) - Good for quick chats. Avoid any discussion that might need to be referenced later on, as the chat history is not retained long.
-* [Google Group](https://groups.google.com/g/netbox-discuss) - Legacy mailing list; slowly being phased out in favor of GitHub discussions.
+![GitHub](../media/development/github.png)
 
-## Governance
+There are two permanent branches in the repository:
 
-NetBox follows the [benevolent dictator](http://oss-watch.ac.uk/resources/benevolentdictatorgovernancemodel) model of governance, with [Jeremy Stretch](https://github.com/jeremystretch) ultimately responsible for all changes to the code base. While community contributions are welcomed and encouraged, the lead maintainer's primary role is to ensure the project's long-term maintainability and continued focus on its primary functions (in other words, avoid scope creep).
+* `main` - Active development for the upcoming patch release. Pull requests will typically be based on this branch unless they introduce breaking changes that must be deferred until the next minor release.
+* `feature` - New feature work to be introduced in the next minor release (e.g. from v4.2 to v4.3).
 
-## Project Structure
-
-All development of the current NetBox release occurs in the `develop` branch; releases are packaged from the `master` branch. The `master` branch should _always_ represent the current stable release in its entirety, such that installing NetBox by either downloading a packaged release or cloning the `master` branch provides the same code base.
-
-NetBox components are arranged into functional subsections called _apps_ (a carryover from Django vernacular). Each app holds the models, views, and templates relevant to a particular function:
+NetBox components are arranged into Django apps. Each app holds the models, views, and other resources relevant to a particular function:
 
 * `circuits`: Communications circuits and providers (not to be confused with power circuits)
 * `dcim`: Datacenter infrastructure management (sites, racks, and devices)
@@ -29,3 +23,37 @@ NetBox components are arranged into functional subsections called _apps_ (a carr
 * `users`: Authentication and user preferences
 * `utilities`: Resources which are not user-facing (extendable classes, etc.)
 * `virtualization`: Virtual machines and clusters
+* `wireless`: Wireless links and LANs
+
+All core functionality is stored within the `netbox/` subdirectory. HTML templates are stored in a common `templates/` directory, with model- and view-specific templates arranged by app. Documentation is kept in the `docs/` root directory.
+
+## Proposing Changes
+
+All substantial changes made to the code base are tracked using [GitHub issues](https://docs.github.com/en/issues). Feature requests, bug reports, and similar proposals must all be filed as issues and approved by a maintainer before work begins. This ensures that all changes to the code base are properly documented for future reference.
+
+To submit a new feature request or bug report for NetBox, select and complete the appropriate [issue template](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new/choose). Once your issue has been approved, you're welcome to submit a [pull request](https://docs.github.com/en/pull-requests) containing your proposed changes.
+
+![Opening a new GitHub issue](../media/development/github_new_issue.png)
+
+Check out our [issue intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy) for an overview of the issue triage and approval processes.
+
+!!! tip
+    Avoid starting work on a proposal before it has been accepted. Not all proposed changes will be accepted, and we'd hate for you to waste time working on code that might not make it into the project.
+
+## Getting Help
+
+There are two primary forums for getting assistance with NetBox development:
+
+* [GitHub discussions](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/discussions) - The preferred forum for general discussion and support issues. Ideal for shaping a feature requests prior to submitting an issue.
+* [#netbox on NetDev Community Slack](https://netdev.chat/) - Good for quick chats. Avoid any discussion that might need to be referenced later on, as the chat history is not retained indefinitely.
+
+!!! note
+    Don't use GitHub issues to ask for help: These are reserved for proposed code changes only.
+
+## Governance
+
+NetBox follows the [benevolent dictator](http://oss-watch.ac.uk/resources/benevolentdictatorgovernancemodel) model of governance, with [Jeremy Stretch](https://github.com/jeremystretch) ultimately responsible for all changes to the code base. While community contributions are welcomed and encouraged, the lead maintainer's primary role is to ensure the project's long-term maintainability and continued focus on its primary functions.
+
+## Licensing
+
+The entire NetBox project is licensed as open source under the [Apache 2.0 license](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/LICENSE.txt). This is a very permissive license which allows unlimited redistribution of all code within the project. Note that all submissions to the project are subject to the same license.

docs/development/internationalization.md

@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+# Internationalization
+
+Beginning with NetBox v4.0, NetBox will leverage [Django's automatic translation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/i18n/translation/) to support languages other than English. This page details the areas of the project which require special attention to ensure functioning translation support. Briefly, these include:
+
+* The `verbose_name` and `verbose_name_plural` Meta attributes for each model
+* The `verbose_name` and (if defined) `help_text` for each model field
+* The `label` for each form field
+* Headers for `fieldsets` on each form class
+* The `verbose_name` for each table column
+* All human-readable strings within templates must be wrapped with `{% trans %}` or `{% blocktrans %}`
+
+The rest of this document elaborates on each of the items above.
+
+## General Guidance
+
+* Wrap human-readable strings with Django's `gettext()` or `gettext_lazy()` utility functions to enable automatic translation. Generally, `gettext_lazy()` is preferred (and sometimes required) to defer translation until the string is displayed.
+
+* By convention, the preferred translation function is typically imported as an underscore (`_`) to minimize boilerplate code. Thus, you will often see translation as e.g. `_("Some text")`. It is still an option to import and use alternative translation functions (e.g. `pgettext()` and `ngettext()`) normally as needed.
+
+* Avoid passing markup and other non-natural language where possible. Everything wrapped by a translation function gets exported to a messages file for translation by a human.
+
+* Where the intended meaning of the translated string may not be obvious, use `pgettext()` or `pgettext_lazy()` to include assisting context for the translator. For example:
+
+    ```python
+    # Context, string
+    pgettext("month name", "May")
+    ```
+
+* **Format strings do not support translation.** Avoid "f" strings for messages that must support translation. Instead, use `format()` to accomplish variable replacement:
+
+    ```python
+    # Translation will not work
+    f"There are {count} objects"
+    
+    # Do this instead
+    "There are {count} objects".format(count=count)
+    ```
+
+## Models
+
+1. Import `gettext_lazy` as `_`.
+2. Ensure both `verbose_name` and `verbose_name_plural` are defined under the model's `Meta` class and wrapped with the `gettext_lazy()` shortcut.
+3. Ensure each model field specifies a `verbose_name` wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
+4. Ensure any `help_text` attributes on model fields are also wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
+
+```python
+from django.utils.translation import gettext_lazy as _
+
+class Circuit(PrimaryModel):
+    commit_rate = models.PositiveIntegerField(
+        ...
+        verbose_name=_('commit rate (Kbps)'),
+        help_text=_("Committed rate")
+    )
+
+    class Meta:
+        verbose_name = _('circuit')
+        verbose_name_plural = _('circuits')
+```
+
+## Forms
+
+1. Import `gettext_lazy` as `_`.
+2. All form fields must specify a `label` wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
+3. The name of each FieldSet on a form must be wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
+
+```python
+from django.utils.translation import gettext_lazy as _
+from utilities.forms.rendering import FieldSet
+
+class CircuitBulkEditForm(NetBoxModelBulkEditForm):
+    description = forms.CharField(
+        label=_('Description'),
+        ...
+    )
+
+    fieldsets = (
+        FieldSet('provider', 'type', 'status', 'description', name=_('Circuit')),
+    )
+```
+
+## Tables
+
+1. Import `gettext_lazy` as `_`.
+2. All table columns must specify a `verbose_name` wrapped with `gettext_lazy()`.
+
+```python
+from django.utils.translation import gettext_lazy as _
+
+class CircuitTable(TenancyColumnsMixin, ContactsColumnMixin, NetBoxTable):
+    provider = tables.Column(
+        verbose_name=_('Provider'),
+        ...
+    )
+```
+
+## Templates
+
+1. Ensure translation support is enabled by including `{% load i18n %}` at the top of the template.
+2. Use the [`{% trans %}`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/i18n/translation/#translate-template-tag) tag (short for "translate") to wrap short strings.
+3. Longer strings may be enclosed between [`{% blocktrans %}`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/i18n/translation/#blocktranslate-template-tag) and `{% endblocktrans %}` tags to improve readability and to enable variable replacement. (Remember to include the `trimmed` argument to trim whitespace between the tags.)
+4. Avoid passing HTML within translated strings where possible, as this can complicate the work needed of human translators to develop message maps.
+
+```
+{% load i18n %}
+
+{# A short string #}
+<h5 class="card-header">{% trans "Circuit List" %}</h5>
+
+{# A longer string with a context variable #}
+{% blocktrans trimmed with count=object.circuits.count %}
+  There are {count} circuits. Would you like to continue?
+{% endblocktrans %}
+```
+
+!!! warning
+    The `{% blocktrans %}` tag supports only **limited variable replacement**, comparable to the `format()` method on Python strings. It does not permit access to object attributes or the use of other template tags or filters inside it. Ensure that any necessary context is passed as simple variables.
+
+!!! info
+    The `{% trans %}` and `{% blocktrans %}` support the inclusion of contextual hints for translators using the `context` argument:
+
+    ```nohighlight
+    {% trans "May" context "month name" %}
+    ```

docs/development/models.md

@@ -2,95 +2,145 @@
 
 ## Model Types
 
-A NetBox model represents a discrete object type such as a device or IP address. Each model is defined as a Python class and has its own SQL table. All NetBox data models can be categorized by type.
+A NetBox model represents a discrete object type such as a device or IP address. Per [Django convention](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/db/models/), each model is defined as a Python class and has its own table in the PostgreSQL database. All NetBox data models can be categorized by type.
 
-The Django [content types](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/contrib/contenttypes/) framework can be used to reference models within the database. A ContentType instance references a model by its `app_label` and `name`: For example, the Site model is referred to as `dcim.site`. The content type combined with an object's primary key form a globally unique identifier for the object (e.g. `dcim.site:123`).
+The Django [content types](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/contrib/contenttypes/) framework is used to map Django models to database tables. A ContentType instance references a model by its `app_label` and `name`: For example, the Site model within the DCIM app is referred to as `dcim.site`. The content type combined with an object's primary key form a globally unique identifier for the object (e.g. `dcim.site:123`).
 
 ### Features Matrix
 
-* [Change logging](../additional-features/change-logging.md) - Changes to these objects are automatically recorded in the change log
-* [Webhooks](../additional-features/webhooks.md) - NetBox is capable of generating outgoing webhooks for these objects
-* [Custom fields](../customization/custom-fields.md) - These models support the addition of user-defined fields
-* [Export templates](../customization/export-templates.md) - Users can create custom export templates for these models
-* [Tagging](../models/extras/tag.md) - The models can be tagged with user-defined tags
-* [Journaling](../additional-features/journaling.md) - These models support persistent historical commentary
-* Nesting - These models can be nested recursively to create a hierarchy
+Depending on its classification, each NetBox model may support various features which enhance its operation. Each feature is enabled by inheriting from its designated mixin class, and some features also make use of the [application registry](./application-registry.md#model_features).
 
-| Type               | Change Logging   | Webhooks         | Custom Fields    | Export Templates | Tags             | Journaling       | Nesting          |
-| ------------------ | ---------------- | ---------------- | ---------------- | ---------------- | ---------------- | ---------------- | ---------------- |
-| Primary            | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: |                  |
-| Organizational     | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: |                  |                  |                  |
-| Nested Group       | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: |                  |                  | :material-check: |
-| Component          | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: |                  |                  |
-| Component Template | :material-check: | :material-check: | :material-check: |                  |                  |                  |                  |
+| Feature                                                    | Feature Mixin           | Registry Key       | Description                                                                             |
+|------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------|--------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| [Change logging](../features/change-logging.md)            | `ChangeLoggingMixin`    | -                  | Changes to these objects are automatically recorded in the change log                   |
+| Cloning                                                    | `CloningMixin`          | -                  | Provides the `clone()` method to prepare a copy                                         |
+| [Custom fields](../customization/custom-fields.md)         | `CustomFieldsMixin`     | `custom_fields`    | These models support the addition of user-defined fields                                |
+| [Custom links](../customization/custom-links.md)           | `CustomLinksMixin`      | `custom_links`     | These models support the assignment of custom links                                     |
+| [Custom validation](../customization/custom-validation.md) | `CustomValidationMixin` | -                  | Supports the enforcement of custom validation rules                                     |
+| [Export templates](../customization/export-templates.md)   | `ExportTemplatesMixin`  | `export_templates` | Users can create custom export templates for these models                               |
+| [Job results](../features/background-jobs.md)              | `JobsMixin`             | `jobs`             | Background jobs can be scheduled for these models                                       |
+| [Journaling](../features/journaling.md)                    | `JournalingMixin`       | `journaling`       | These models support persistent historical commentary                                   |
+| [Synchronized data](../integrations/synchronized-data.md)  | `SyncedDataMixin`       | `synced_data`      | Certain model data can be automatically synchronized from a remote data source          |
+| [Tagging](../models/extras/tag.md)                         | `TagsMixin`             | `tags`             | The models can be tagged with user-defined tags                                         |
+| [Event rules](../features/event-rules.md)                  | `EventRulesMixin`       | `event_rules`      | Event rules can send webhooks or run custom scripts automatically in response to events |
 
 ## Models Index
 
 ### Primary Models
 
+These are considered the "core" application models which are used to model network infrastructure.
+
 * [circuits.Circuit](../models/circuits/circuit.md)
 * [circuits.Provider](../models/circuits/provider.md)
+* [circuits.ProviderAccount](../models/circuits/provideraccount.md)
 * [circuits.ProviderNetwork](../models/circuits/providernetwork.md)
+* [core.DataFile](../models/core/datafile.md)
+* [core.DataSource](../models/core/datasource.md)
+* [core.Job](../models/core/job.md)
 * [dcim.Cable](../models/dcim/cable.md)
 * [dcim.Device](../models/dcim/device.md)
 * [dcim.DeviceType](../models/dcim/devicetype.md)
+* [dcim.Module](../models/dcim/module.md)
+* [dcim.ModuleType](../models/dcim/moduletype.md)
 * [dcim.PowerFeed](../models/dcim/powerfeed.md)
 * [dcim.PowerPanel](../models/dcim/powerpanel.md)
 * [dcim.Rack](../models/dcim/rack.md)
 * [dcim.RackReservation](../models/dcim/rackreservation.md)
+* [dcim.RackType](../models/dcim/racktype.md)
 * [dcim.Site](../models/dcim/site.md)
 * [dcim.VirtualChassis](../models/dcim/virtualchassis.md)
+* [dcim.VirtualDeviceContext](../models/dcim/virtualdevicecontext.md)
 * [ipam.Aggregate](../models/ipam/aggregate.md)
+* [ipam.ASN](../models/ipam/asn.md)
+* [ipam.FHRPGroup](../models/ipam/fhrpgroup.md)
+* [ipam.FHRPGroupAssignment](../models/ipam/fhrpgroupassignment.md)
 * [ipam.IPAddress](../models/ipam/ipaddress.md)
+* [ipam.IPRange](../models/ipam/iprange.md)
 * [ipam.Prefix](../models/ipam/prefix.md)
 * [ipam.RouteTarget](../models/ipam/routetarget.md)
 * [ipam.Service](../models/ipam/service.md)
+* [ipam.ServiceTemplate](../models/ipam/servicetemplate.md)
 * [ipam.VLAN](../models/ipam/vlan.md)
 * [ipam.VRF](../models/ipam/vrf.md)
+* [tenancy.Contact](../models/tenancy/contact.md)
 * [tenancy.Tenant](../models/tenancy/tenant.md)
 * [virtualization.Cluster](../models/virtualization/cluster.md)
 * [virtualization.VirtualMachine](../models/virtualization/virtualmachine.md)
+* [vpn.IKEPolicy](../models/vpn/ikepolicy.md)
+* [vpn.IKEProposal](../models/vpn/ikeproposal.md)
+* [vpn.IPSecPolicy](../models/vpn/ipsecpolicy.md)
+* [vpn.IPSecProfile](../models/vpn/ipsecprofile.md)
+* [vpn.IPSecProposal](../models/vpn/ipsecproposal.md)
+* [vpn.L2VPN](../models/vpn/l2vpn.md)
+* [vpn.Tunnel](../models/vpn/tunnel.md)
+* [wireless.WirelessLAN](../models/wireless/wirelesslan.md)
+* [wireless.WirelessLink](../models/wireless/wirelesslink.md)
 
 ### Organizational Models
 
+Organization models are used to organize and classify primary models.
+
+* [circuits.CircuitGroup](../models/circuits/circuitgroup.md)
 * [circuits.CircuitType](../models/circuits/circuittype.md)
 * [dcim.DeviceRole](../models/dcim/devicerole.md)
 * [dcim.Manufacturer](../models/dcim/manufacturer.md)
 * [dcim.Platform](../models/dcim/platform.md)
 * [dcim.RackRole](../models/dcim/rackrole.md)
+* [ipam.ASNRange](../models/ipam/asnrange.md)
 * [ipam.RIR](../models/ipam/rir.md)
 * [ipam.Role](../models/ipam/role.md)
 * [ipam.VLANGroup](../models/ipam/vlangroup.md)
+* [tenancy.ContactRole](../models/tenancy/contactrole.md)
 * [virtualization.ClusterGroup](../models/virtualization/clustergroup.md)
 * [virtualization.ClusterType](../models/virtualization/clustertype.md)
+* [vpn.TunnelGroup](../models/vpn/tunnelgroup.md)
 
 ### Nested Group Models
 
+Nested group models behave like organizational model, but self-nest within a recursive hierarchy. For example, the Region model can be used to represent a hierarchy of countries, states, and cities.
+
 * [dcim.Location](../models/dcim/location.md) (formerly RackGroup)
 * [dcim.Region](../models/dcim/region.md)
 * [dcim.SiteGroup](../models/dcim/sitegroup.md)
+* [tenancy.ContactGroup](../models/tenancy/contactgroup.md)
 * [tenancy.TenantGroup](../models/tenancy/tenantgroup.md)
+* [wireless.WirelessLANGroup](../models/wireless/wirelesslangroup.md)
 
 ### Component Models
 
+Component models represent individual physical or virtual components belonging to a device or virtual machine.
+
 * [dcim.ConsolePort](../models/dcim/consoleport.md)
 * [dcim.ConsoleServerPort](../models/dcim/consoleserverport.md)
 * [dcim.DeviceBay](../models/dcim/devicebay.md)
 * [dcim.FrontPort](../models/dcim/frontport.md)
 * [dcim.Interface](../models/dcim/interface.md)
 * [dcim.InventoryItem](../models/dcim/inventoryitem.md)
+* [dcim.ModuleBay](../models/dcim/modulebay.md)
 * [dcim.PowerOutlet](../models/dcim/poweroutlet.md)
 * [dcim.PowerPort](../models/dcim/powerport.md)
 * [dcim.RearPort](../models/dcim/rearport.md)
+* [virtualization.VirtualDisk](../models/virtualization/virtualdisk.md)
 * [virtualization.VMInterface](../models/virtualization/vminterface.md)
 
 ### Component Template Models
 
+These function as templates to effect the replication of device and virtual machine components. Component template models support a limited feature set, including change logging, custom validation, and event rules.
+
 * [dcim.ConsolePortTemplate](../models/dcim/consoleporttemplate.md)
 * [dcim.ConsoleServerPortTemplate](../models/dcim/consoleserverporttemplate.md)
 * [dcim.DeviceBayTemplate](../models/dcim/devicebaytemplate.md)
 * [dcim.FrontPortTemplate](../models/dcim/frontporttemplate.md)
 * [dcim.InterfaceTemplate](../models/dcim/interfacetemplate.md)
+* [dcim.InventoryItemTemplate](../models/dcim/inventoryitemtemplate.md)
+* [dcim.ModuleBayTemplate](../models/dcim/modulebaytemplate.md)
 * [dcim.PowerOutletTemplate](../models/dcim/poweroutlettemplate.md)
 * [dcim.PowerPortTemplate](../models/dcim/powerporttemplate.md)
 * [dcim.RearPortTemplate](../models/dcim/rearporttemplate.md)
+
+### Connection Models
+
+Connection models are used to model the connections, or connection endpoints between models.
+
+* [circuits.CircuitTermination](../models/circuits/circuittermination.md)
+* [vpn.TunnelTermination](../models/vpn/tunneltermination.md)

docs/development/release-checklist.md

@@ -1,91 +1,150 @@
 # Release Checklist
 
-## Minor Version Bumps
+This documentation describes the process of packaging and publishing a new NetBox release. There are three types of release:
 
-### Address Pinned Dependencies
+* Major release (e.g. v3.7.8 to v4.0.0)
+* Minor release (e.g. v4.0.10 to v4.1.0)
+* Patch release (e.g. v4.1.0 to v4.1.1)
 
-Check `base_requirements.txt` for any dependencies pinned to a specific version, and upgrade them to their most stable release (where possible).
+While major releases generally introduce some very substantial change to the application, they are typically treated the same as minor version increments for the purpose of release packaging.
 
-### Link to the Release Notes Page
+## Minor Version Releases
 
-Add the release notes (`/docs/release-notes/X.Y.md`) to the table of contents within `mkdocs.yml`, and point `index.md` to the new file.
+### Address Constrained Dependencies
 
-### Manually Perform a New Install
-
-Install `mkdocs` in your local environment, then start the documentation server:
-
-```no-highlight
-$ pip install -r docs/requirements.txt
-$ mkdocs serve
-```
-
-Follow these instructions to perform a new installation of NetBox. This process must _not_ be automated: The goal of this step is to catch any errors or omissions in the documentation, and ensure that it is kept up-to-date for each release. Make any necessary changes to the documentation before proceeding with the release.
-
-### Close the Release Milestone
-
-Close the release milestone on GitHub after ensuring there are no remaining open issues associated with it.
-
-### Merge the Release Branch
-
-Submit a pull request to merge the `feature` branch into the `develop` branch in preparation for its release.
-
----
-
-## All Releases
-
-### Update Requirements
-
-Required Python packages are maintained in two files. `base_requirements.txt` contains a list of all the packages required by NetBox. Some of them may be pinned to a specific version of the package due to a known issue. For example:
+Sometimes it becomes necessary to constrain dependencies to a particular version, e.g. to work around a bug in a newer release or to avoid a breaking change that we have yet to accommodate. (Another common example is to limit the upstream Django release.) For example:
 
 ```
 # https://github.com/encode/django-rest-framework/issues/6053
 djangorestframework==3.8.1
 ```
 
-The other file is `requirements.txt`, which lists each of the required packages pinned to its current stable version. When NetBox is installed, the Python environment is configured to match this file. This helps ensure that a new release of a dependency doesn't break NetBox.
+These version constraints are added to `base_requirements.txt` to ensure that newer packages are not installed when updating the pinned dependencies in `requirements.txt` (see the [Update Requirements](#update-python-dependencies) section below). Before each new minor version of NetBox is released, all such constraints on dependent packages should be addressed if feasible. This guards against the collection of stale constraints over time.
 
-Every release should refresh `requirements.txt` so that it lists the most recent stable release of each package. To do this:
+### Close the Release Milestone
 
-1. Create a new virtual environment.
-2. Install the latest version of all required packages `pip install -U -r base_requirements.txt`).
-3. Run all tests and check that the UI and API function as expected.
-4. Review each requirement's release notes for any breaking or otherwise noteworthy changes.
-5. Update the package versions in `requirements.txt` as appropriate.
+Close the [release milestone](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/milestones) on GitHub after ensuring there are no remaining open issues associated with it.
 
-In cases where upgrading a dependency to its most recent release is breaking, it should be pinned to its current minor version in `base_requirements.txt` (with an explanatory comment) and revisited for the next major NetBox release.
+### Update the Release Notes
 
-### Verify CI Build Status
+Check that a link to the release notes for the new version is present in the navigation menu (defined in `mkdocs.yml`), and that a summary of all major new features has been added to `docs/index.md`.
 
-Ensure that continuous integration testing on the `develop` branch is completing successfully.
+### Manually Perform a New Install
+
+Start the documentation server and navigate to the current version of the installation docs:
+
+```no-highlight
+mkdocs serve
+```
+
+Follow these instructions to perform a new installation of NetBox in a temporary environment. This process must not be automated: The goal of this step is to catch any errors or omissions in the documentation, and ensure that it is kept up-to-date for each release. Make any necessary changes to the documentation before proceeding with the release.
+
+### Test Upgrade Paths
+
+Upgrading from a previous version typically involves database migrations, which must work without errors. Supported upgrade paths include from one minor version to another within the same major version (i.e. 4.0 to 4.1), as well as from the latest patch version of the previous minor version (i.e. 3.7 to 4.0 or to 4.1). Prior to release, test all these supported paths by loading demo data from the source version and performing a `./manage.py migrate`.
+
+### Merge the `feature` Branch
+
+Submit a pull request to merge the `feature` branch into the `main` branch in preparation for its release. Once it has been merged, continue with the section for patch releases below.
+
+### Rebuild Demo Data (After Release)
+
+After the release of a new minor version, generate a new demo data snapshot compatible with the new release. See the [`netbox-demo-data`](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-demo-data) repository for instructions.
+
+---
+
+## Patch Releases
+
+### Create a Release Branch
+
+Begin by creating a new branch (based off of `main`) to effect the release. This will comprise the changes listed below.
+
+```
+git checkout main
+git checkout -B release-vX.Y.Z
+```
+
+### Notify netbox-docker Project of Any Relevant Changes
+
+Notify the [`netbox-docker`](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-docker) maintainers (in **#netbox-docker**) of any changes that may be relevant to their build process, including:
+
+* Significant changes to `upgrade.sh`
+* Increases in minimum versions for service dependencies (PostgreSQL, Redis, etc.)
+* Any changes to the reference installation
+
+### Update Python Dependencies
+
+Before each release, update each of NetBox's Python dependencies to its most recent stable version. These are defined in `requirements.txt`, which is updated from `base_requirements.txt` using `pip`. To do this:
+
+1. Upgrade the installed version of all required packages in your environment (`pip install -U -r base_requirements.txt`).
+2. Run all tests and check that the UI and API function as expected.
+3. Review each requirement's release notes for any breaking or otherwise noteworthy changes.
+4. Update the package versions in `requirements.txt` as appropriate.
+
+In cases where upgrading a dependency to its most recent release is breaking, it should be constrained to its current minor version in `base_requirements.txt` with an explanatory comment and revisited for the next major NetBox release (see the [Address Constrained Dependencies](#address-constrained-dependencies) section above).
+
+### Update UI Dependencies
+
+Check whether any UI dependencies (JavaScript packages, fonts, etc.) need to be updated by running `yarn outdated` from within the `project-static/` directory. [Upgrade these dependencies](./web-ui.md#updating-dependencies) as necessary, then run `yarn bundle` to generate the necessary files for distribution.
+
+### Rebuild the Device Type Definition Schema
+
+Run the following command to update the device type definition validation schema:
+
+```nohighlight
+./manage.py buildschema --write
+```
+
+This will automatically update the schema file at `contrib/generated_schema.json`.
+
+### Update & Compile Translations
+
+Updated language translations should be pulled from [Transifex](https://app.transifex.com/netbox-community/netbox/dashboard/) and re-compiled for each new release. First, retrieve any updated translation files using the Transifex CLI client:
+
+```no-highlight
+tx pull
+```
+
+Then, compile these portable (`.po`) files for use in the application:
+
+```no-highlight
+./manage.py compilemessages
+```
+
+!!! tip
+    Consult the translation documentation for more detail on [updating translated strings](./translations.md#updating-translated-strings) if you've not set up the Transifex client already.
 
 ### Update Version and Changelog
 
-* Update the `VERSION` constant in `settings.py` to the new release version.
+* Update the version and published date in `release.yaml` with the current version & date. Add a designation (e.g.g `beta1`) if applicable.
 * Update the example version numbers in the feature request and bug report templates under `.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATES/`.
 * Replace the "FUTURE" placeholder in the release notes with the current date.
 
-Commit these changes to the `develop` branch.
-
 ### Submit a Pull Request
 
-Submit a pull request title **"Release vX.Y.Z"** to merge the `develop` branch into `master`. Copy the documented release notes into the pull request's body.
+Commit the above changes and submit a pull request titled **"Release vX.Y.Z"** to merge the current release branch (e.g. `release-vX.Y.Z`) into `main`. Copy the documented release notes into the pull request's body.
 
-Once CI has completed on the PR, merge it.
+Once CI has completed and a colleague has reviewed the PR, merge it. This effects a new release in the `main` branch.
 
 ### Create a New Release
 
-Draft a [new release](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases/new) with the following parameters.
+Create a [new release](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases/new) on GitHub with the following parameters.
 
-* **Tag:** Current version (e.g. `v2.9.9`)
-* **Target:** `master`
-* **Title:** Version and date (e.g. `v2.9.9 - 2020-11-09`)
+* **Tag:** Current version (e.g. `v4.2.1`)
+* **Target:** `main`
+* **Title:** Version and date (e.g. `v4.2.1 - 2025-01-17`)
+* **Description:** Copy from the pull request body, then promote the `###` headers to `##` ones
 
-Copy the description from the pull request to the release.
+Once created, the release will become available for users to install.
 
-### Update the Development Version
+### Update the Public Documentation
 
-On the `develop` branch, update `VERSION` in `settings.py` to point to the next release. For example, if you just released v2.9.9, set:
+After a release has been published, the public NetBox documentation needs to be updated. This is accomplished by running two actions on the [netboxlabs-docs](https://github.com/netboxlabs/netboxlabs-docs) repository.
 
-```
-VERSION = 'v2.9.10-dev'
-```
+First, run the `build-site` action, by navigating to Actions > build-site > Run workflow. This process compiles the documentation along with an overlay for integration with the documentation portal at <https://netboxlabs.com/docs>. The job should take about two minutes.
+
+Once the documentation files have been compiled, they must be published by running the `deploy-kinsta` action. Select the desired deployment environment (staging or production) and specify `latest` as the deploy tag.
+
+Clear the CDN cache from the [Kinsta](https://my.kinsta.com/) portal. Navigate to _Sites_ / _NetBox Labs_ / _Live_, select _Cache_ in the left-nav, click the _Clear Cache_ button, and confirm the clear operation.
+
+Finally, verify that the documentation at <https://netboxlabs.com/docs/netbox/en/stable/> has been updated.

docs/development/search.md

@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+# Search
+
+NetBox v3.4 introduced a new global search mechanism, which employs the `extras.CachedValue` model to store discrete field values from many models in a single table.
+
+## SearchIndex
+
+To enable search support for a model, declare and register a subclass of `netbox.search.SearchIndex` for it. Typically, this will be done within an app's `search.py` module.
+
+```python
+from netbox.search import SearchIndex, register_search
+
+@register_search
+class MyModelIndex(SearchIndex):
+    model = MyModel
+    fields = (
+        ('name', 100),
+        ('description', 500),
+        ('comments', 5000),
+    )
+    display_attrs = ('site', 'device', 'status', 'description')
+```
+
+A SearchIndex subclass defines both its model and a list of two-tuples specifying which model fields to be indexed and the weight (precedence) associated with each. Guidance on weight assignment for fields is provided below.
+
+### Field Weight Guidance
+
+| Weight | Field Role                                       | Examples                                           |
+|--------|--------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------|
+| 50     | Unique serialized attribute                      | Device.asset_tag                                   |
+| 60     | Unique serialized attribute (per related object) | Device.serial                                      |
+| 100    | Primary human identifier                         | Device.name, Circuit.cid, Cable.label              |
+| 110    | Slug                                             | Site.slug                                          |
+| 200    | Secondary identifier                             | ProviderAccount.account, DeviceType.part_number    |
+| 300    | Highly unique descriptive attribute              | CircuitTermination.xconnect_id, IPAddress.dns_name |
+| 500    | Description                                      | Site.description                                   |
+| 1000   | Custom field default                             | -                                                  |
+| 2000   | Other discrete attribute                         | CircuitTermination.port_speed                      |
+| 5000   | Comment field                                    | Site.comments                                      |

docs/development/signals.md

@@ -9,3 +9,27 @@ This signal is sent by models which inherit from `CustomValidationMixin` at the
 ### Receivers
 
 * `extras.signals.run_custom_validators()`
+
+## core.job_start
+
+This signal is sent whenever a [background job](../features/background-jobs.md) is started.
+
+### Receivers
+
+* `extras.signals.process_job_start_event_rules()`
+
+## core.job_end
+
+This signal is sent whenever a [background job](../features/background-jobs.md) is terminated.
+
+### Receivers
+
+* `extras.signals.process_job_end_event_rules()`
+
+## core.pre_sync
+
+This signal is sent when the [DataSource](../models/core/datasource.md) model's `sync()` method is called.
+
+## core.post_sync
+
+This signal is sent when a [DataSource](../models/core/datasource.md) finishes synchronizing.

docs/development/style-guide.md

@@ -1,36 +1,55 @@
 # Style Guide
 
-NetBox generally follows the [Django style guide](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/internals/contributing/writing-code/coding-style/), which is itself based on [PEP 8](https://www.python.org/dev/peps/pep-0008/). [Pycodestyle](https://github.com/pycqa/pycodestyle) is used to validate code formatting, ignoring certain violations. See `scripts/cibuild.sh`.
+NetBox generally follows the [Django style guide](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/internals/contributing/writing-code/coding-style/), which is itself based on [PEP 8](https://www.python.org/dev/peps/pep-0008/). [ruff](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/) is used for linting (with certain [exceptions](#linter-exceptions)).
 
-## PEP 8 Exceptions
+## Code
 
-* Wildcard imports (for example, `from .constants import *`) are acceptable under any of the following conditions:
-    * The library being import contains only constant declarations (e.g. `constants.py`)
-    * The library being imported explicitly defines `__all__`
+### General Guidance
 
-* Maximum line length is 120 characters (E501)
-    * This does not apply to HTML templates or to automatically generated code (e.g. database migrations).
+* When in doubt, remain consistent: It is better to be consistently incorrect than inconsistently correct. If you notice in the course of unrelated work a pattern that should be corrected, continue to follow the pattern for now and submit a separate bug report so that the entire code base can be evaluated at a later point.
 
-* Line breaks are permitted following binary operators (W504)
+* Prioritize readability over concision. Python is a very flexible language that typically offers several multiple options for expressing a given piece of logic, but some may be more friendly to the reader than others. (List comprehensions are particularly vulnerable to over-optimization.) Always remain considerate of the future reader who may need to interpret your code without the benefit of the context within which you are writing it.
 
-## Enforcing Code Style
+* Include a newline at the end of every file.
 
-The `pycodestyle` utility (previously `pep8`) is used by the CI process to enforce code style. It is strongly recommended to include as part of your commit process. A git commit hook is provided in the source at `scripts/git-hooks/pre-commit`. Linking to this script from `.git/hooks/` will invoke `pycodestyle` prior to every commit attempt and abort if the validation fails.
+* No easter eggs. While they can be fun, NetBox must be considered as a business-critical tool. The potential, however minor, for introducing a bug caused by unnecessary code is best avoided entirely.
+
+* Constants (variables which do not change) should be declared in `constants.py` within each app. Wildcard imports from the file are acceptable.
+
+* Every model must have a [docstring](https://peps.python.org/pep-0257/). Every custom method should include an explanation of its function.
+
+* Nested API serializers generate minimal representations of an object. These are stored separately from the primary serializers to avoid circular dependencies. Always import nested serializers from other apps directly. For example, from within the DCIM app you would write `from ipam.api.nested_serializers import NestedIPAddressSerializer`.
+
+### Linting
+
+The [ruff](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/) linter is used to enforce code style. A [pre-commit hook](./getting-started.md#3-enable-pre-commit-hooks) which runs this automatically is included with NetBox. To invoke `ruff` manually, run:
 
 ```
-$ cd .git/hooks/
-$ ln -s ../../scripts/git-hooks/pre-commit
+ruff check netbox/
 ```
 
-To invoke `pycodestyle` manually, run:
+#### Linter Exceptions
 
-```
-pycodestyle --ignore=W504,E501 netbox/
-```
+The following rules are ignored when linting.
 
-## Introducing New Dependencies
+##### [E501](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/rules/line-too-long/): Line too long
 
-The introduction of a new dependency is best avoided unless it is absolutely necessary. For small features, it's generally preferable to replicate functionality within the NetBox code base rather than to introduce reliance on an external project. This reduces both the burden of tracking new releases and our exposure to outside bugs and attacks.
+NetBox does not enforce a hard restriction on line length, although a maximum length of 120 characters is strongly encouraged for Python code where possible. The maximum length does not apply to HTML templates or to automatically generated code (e.g. database migrations).
+
+##### [F403](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/rules/undefined-local-with-import-star/): Undefined local with import star
+
+Wildcard imports (for example, `from .constants import *`) are acceptable under any of the following conditions:
+
+* The library being import contains only constant declarations (e.g. `constants.py`)
+* The library being imported explicitly defines `__all__`
+
+##### [F405](https://docs.astral.sh/ruff/rules/undefined-local-with-import-star-usage/): Undefined local with import star usage
+
+The justification for ignoring this rule is the same as F403 above.
+
+### Introducing New Dependencies
+
+The introduction of a new dependency is best avoided unless it is absolutely necessary. For small features, it's generally preferable to replicate functionality within the NetBox code base rather than to introduce reliance on an external project. This reduces both the burden of tracking new releases and our exposure to outside bugs and supply chain attacks.
 
 If there's a strong case for introducing a new dependency, it must meet the following criteria:
 
@@ -39,24 +58,22 @@ If there's a strong case for introducing a new dependency, it must meet the foll
 * It must be actively maintained, with no longer than one year between releases.
 * It must be available via the [Python Package Index](https://pypi.org/) (PyPI).
 
-When adding a new dependency, a short description of the package and the URL of its code repository must be added to `base_requirements.txt`. Additionally, a line specifying the package name pinned to the current stable release must be added to `requirements.txt`. This ensures that NetBox will install only the known-good release and simplify support efforts.
+When adding a new dependency, a short description of the package and the URL of its code repository must be added to `base_requirements.txt`. Additionally, a line specifying the package name pinned to the current stable release must be added to `requirements.txt`. This ensures that NetBox will install only the known-good release.
 
-## General Guidance
+## Written Works
 
-* When in doubt, remain consistent: It is better to be consistently incorrect than inconsistently correct. If you notice in the course of unrelated work a pattern that should be corrected, continue to follow the pattern for now and open a bug so that the entire code base can be evaluated at a later point.
+### General Guidance
 
-* Prioritize readability over concision. Python is a very flexible language that typically offers several options for expressing a given piece of logic, but some may be more friendly to the reader than others. (List comprehensions are particularly vulnerable to over-optimization.) Always remain considerate of the future reader who may need to interpret your code without the benefit of the context within which you are writing it.
+* Written material must always meet a reasonable professional standard, with proper grammar, spelling, and punctuation.
 
-* No easter eggs. While they can be fun, NetBox must be considered as a business-critical tool. The potential, however minor, for introducing a bug caused by unnecessary logic is best avoided entirely.
+* Use two line breaks between paragraphs.
 
-* Constants (variables which generally do not change) should be declared in `constants.py` within each app. Wildcard imports from the file are acceptable.
+* Use only a single space between sentences.
 
-* Every model should have a docstring. Every custom method should include an explanation of its function.
+* All documentation is to be written in [Markdown](../reference/markdown.md), with modest amounts of HTML permitted where needed to overcome technical limitations.
 
-* Nested API serializers generate minimal representations of an object. These are stored separately from the primary serializers to avoid circular dependencies. Always import nested serializers from other apps directly. For example, from within the DCIM app you would write `from ipam.api.nested_serializers import NestedIPAddressSerializer`.
+### Branding
 
-## Branding
+* When referring to NetBox in writing, use the proper form "NetBox," with the letters N and B capitalized. The lowercase form "netbox" should be used in code, filenames, etc. but never "Netbox" or any other deviation.
 
-* When referring to NetBox in writing, use the proper form "NetBox," with the letters N and B capitalized. The lowercase form "netbox" should be used in code, filenames, etc. But never "Netbox" or any other deviation.
-
-* There is an SVG form of the NetBox logo at [docs/netbox_logo.svg](../netbox_logo.svg). It is preferred to use this logo for all purposes as it scales to arbitrary sizes without loss of resolution. If a raster image is required, the SVG logo should be converted to a PNG image of the prescribed size.
+* There are SVG forms of the NetBox logo for both [light mode](../netbox_logo_light.svg) and [dark mode](../netbox_logo_dark.svg) available. It is preferred to use the SVG logo for all purposes as it scales to arbitrary sizes without loss of resolution. If a raster image is required, the SVG logo should be converted to a PNG image of the desired size.

docs/development/translations.md

@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+# Translations
+
+NetBox coordinates all translation work using the [Transifex](https://explore.transifex.com/netbox-community/netbox/) platform. Signing up for a Transifex account is free.
+
+All language translations in NetBox are generated from the source file found at `netbox/translations/en/LC_MESSAGES/django.po`. This file contains the original English strings with empty mappings, and is generated as part of NetBox's release process. Transifex updates source strings from this file on a recurring basis, so new translation strings will appear in the platform automatically as it is updated in the code base.
+
+Reviewers log into Transifex and navigate to their designated language(s) to translate strings. The initial translation for most strings will be machine-generated via the AWS Translate service. Human reviewers are responsible for reviewing these translations and making corrections where necessary.
+
+## Updating Translation Sources
+
+To update the English `.po` file from which all translations are derived, use the `makemessages` management command (ignoring the `project-static/` directory):
+
+```nohighlight
+./manage.py makemessages -l en -i "project-static/*"
+```
+
+Then, commit the change and push to the `main` branch on GitHub. Any new strings will appear for translation on Transifex automatically.
+
+!!! note
+    It is typically not necessary to update source strings manually, as this is done nightly by a [GitHub action](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/main/.github/workflows/update-translation-strings.yml).
+
+## Updating Translated Strings
+
+Typically, translated strings need to be updated only as part of the NetBox [release process](./release-checklist.md).
+
+Check the Transifex dashboard for languages that are not marked _ready for use_, being sure to click _Show all languages_ if it appears at the bottom of the list. Use machine translation to round out any not-ready languages. It's not necessary to review the machine translation immediately as the translation teams will handle that aspect; the goal at this stage is to get translations included in the Transifex pull request.
+
+To download translated strings automatically, you'll need to:
+
+1. Install the [Transifex CLI client](https://github.com/transifex/cli)
+2. Generate a [Transifex API token](https://app.transifex.com/user/settings/api/)
+
+Once you have the client set up, run the following command:
+
+```no-highlight
+TX_TOKEN=$TOKEN tx pull
+```
+
+This will download all portable (`.po`) translation files from Transifex, updating them locally as needed.
+
+Once retrieved, the updated strings need to be compiled into new `.mo` files so they can be used by the application. Run Django's [`compilemessages`](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/django-admin/#django-admin-compilemessages) management command to compile them:
+
+```no-highlight
+./manage.py compilemessages
+```
+
+Once any new `.mo` files have been generated, they need to be committed and pushed back up to GitHub. (Again, this is typically done as part of publishing a new NetBox release.)
+
+## Proposing New Languages
+
+If you'd like to add support for a new language to NetBox, the first step is to [submit a GitHub issue](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new?assignees=&labels=type%3A+translation&projects=&template=translation.yaml) to capture the proposal. While we'd like to add as many languages as possible, we do need to limit the rate at which new languages are added. New languages will be selected according to community interest and the number of volunteers who sign up as translators.
+
+Once a proposed language has been approved, a NetBox maintainer will:
+
+* Add it to the Transifex platform
+* Designate one or more reviewers
+* Create the initial machine-generated translations for review
+* Add it to the list of supported languages

docs/development/user-preferences.md

@@ -4,8 +4,10 @@ The `users.UserConfig` model holds individual preferences for each user in the f
 
 ## Available Preferences
 
-| Name | Description |
-| ---- | ----------- |
-| extras.configcontext.format | Preferred format when rendering config context data (JSON or YAML) |
-| pagination.per_page | The number of items to display per page of a paginated table |
-| tables.TABLE_NAME.columns | The ordered list of columns to display when viewing the table |
+| Name                     | Description                                                   |
+|--------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------|
+| data_format              | Preferred format when rendering raw data (JSON or YAML)       |
+| pagination.per_page      | The number of items to display per page of a paginated table  |
+| pagination.placement     | Where to display the paginator controls relative to the table |
+| tables.${table}.columns  | The ordered list of columns to display when viewing the table |
+| tables.${table}.ordering | A list of column names by which the table should be ordered   |

docs/development/web-ui.md

@@ -1,25 +1,37 @@
 # Web UI Development
 
+## Code Structure
+
+Most static resources for the NetBox UI are housed within the `netbox/project-static/` directory.
+
+| Path      | Description                                        |
+|-----------|----------------------------------------------------|
+| `dist/`   | Destination path for installed dependencies        |
+| `docs/`   | Local build path for documentation                 |
+| `img/`    | Image files                                        |
+| `js/`     | Miscellaneous JavaScript resources served directly |
+| `src/`    | TypeScript resources (to be compiled into JS)      |
+| `styles/` | Sass resources (to be compiled into CSS)           |
+
 ## Front End Technologies
 
-The NetBox UI is built on languages and frameworks:
+Front end scripting is written in [TypeScript](https://www.typescriptlang.org/), which is a strongly-typed extension to JavaScript. TypeScript is "transpiled" into JavaScript resources which are served to and executed by the client web browser.
 
-### Styling & HTML Elements
+All UI styling is written in [Sass](https://sass-lang.com/), which is an extension to browser-native [Cascading Stylesheets (CSS)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS). Similar to how TypeScript content is transpiled to JavaScript, Sass resources (`.scss` files) are compiled to CSS.
 
-#### [Bootstrap](https://getbootstrap.com/) 5
+## Dependencies
 
-The majority of the NetBox UI is made up of stock Bootstrap components, with some styling modifications and custom components added on an as-needed basis. Bootstrap uses [Sass](https://sass-lang.com/), and NetBox extends Bootstrap's core Sass files for theming and customization.
+The following software is employed by the NetBox user interface.
 
-### Client-side Scripting
-
-#### [TypeScript](https://www.typescriptlang.org/)
-
-All client-side scripting is transpiled from TypeScript to JavaScript and served by Django. In development, TypeScript is an _extremely_ effective tool for accurately describing and checking the code, which leads to significantly fewer bugs, a better development experience, and more predictable/readable code.
-
-As part of the [bundling](#bundling) process, Bootstrap's JavaScript plugins are imported and bundled alongside NetBox's front-end code.
-
-!!! danger "NetBox is jQuery-free"
-    Following the Bootstrap team's deprecation of jQuery in Bootstrap 5, NetBox also no longer uses jQuery in front-end code.
+* [Bootstrap 5](https://getbootstrap.com/) - A popular CSS & JS framework
+* [clipboard.js](https://clipboardjs.com/) - A lightweight package for enabling copy-to-clipboard functionality
+* [flatpickr](https://flatpickr.js.org/) - A lightweight date & time selection widget
+* [gridstack.js](https://gridstackjs.com/) - Enables interactive grid layouts (for the dashboard)
+* [HTMX](https://htmx.org/) - Enables dynamic web interfaces through the use of HTML element attributes
+* [Material Design Icons](https://pictogrammers.com/library/mdi/) - An extensive open source collection of graphical icons, delivered as a web font
+* [query-string](https://www.npmjs.com/package/query-string) - Assists with parsing URL query strings
+* [Tabler](https://tabler.io/) - A web application UI toolkit & theme based on Bootstrap 5
+* [Tom Select](https://tom-select.js.org/) - Provides dynamic selection form fields
 
 ## Guidance
 
@@ -54,6 +66,41 @@ $ yarn
 !!! warning "Check Your Working Directory"
     You need to be in the `netbox/project-static` directory to run the below `yarn` commands.
 
+### Updating Dependencies
+
+Run `yarn outdated` to identify outdated dependencies.
+
+```
+$ yarn outdated
+yarn outdated v1.22.19
+info Color legend :
+ "<red>"    : Major Update backward-incompatible updates
+ "<yellow>" : Minor Update backward-compatible features
+ "<green>"  : Patch Update backward-compatible bug fixes
+Package                          Current Wanted  Latest Workspace Package Type    URL
+bootstrap                        5.3.1   5.3.1   5.3.3  netbox    dependencies    https://getbootstrap.com/
+```
+
+Run `yarn upgrade --latest` to automatically upgrade these packages to their most recent versions.
+
+```
+$ yarn upgrade bootstrap --latest
+yarn upgrade v1.22.19
+[1/4] Resolving packages...
+[2/4] Fetching packages...
+[3/4] Linking dependencies...
+[4/4] Rebuilding all packages...
+success Saved lockfile.
+success Saved 1 new dependency.
+info Direct dependencies
+└─ bootstrap@5.3.3
+info All dependencies
+└─ bootstrap@5.3.3
+Done in 0.95s.
+```
+
+`package.json` will be updated to reflect the new package versions automatically.
+
 ### Bundling
 
 In order for the TypeScript and Sass (SCSS) source files to be usable by a browser, they must first be transpiled (TypeScript → JavaScript, Sass → CSS), bundled, and minified. After making changes to TypeScript or Sass source files, run `yarn bundle`.

docs/extra.css

@@ -5,6 +5,10 @@ img {
     margin-right: auto;
 }
 
+.md-content img {
+    background-color: rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.64);
+}
+
 /* Tables */
 table {
     margin-bottom: 24px;

docs/features/api-integration.md

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+# API & Integration
+
+NetBox includes a slew of features which enable integration with other tools and resources powering your network.
+
+## REST API
+
+NetBox's REST API, powered by the [Django REST Framework](https://www.django-rest-framework.org/), provides a robust yet accessible interface for creating, modifying, and deleting objects. Employing HTTP for transfer and JSON for data encapsulation, the REST API is easily consumed by clients on any platform and extremely well suited for automation tasks.
+
+```no-highlight
+curl -s -X POST \
+-H "Authorization: Token $TOKEN" \
+-H "Content-Type: application/json" \
+http://netbox/api/ipam/prefixes/ \
+--data '{"prefix": "192.0.2.0/24", "site": {"name": "Branch 12"}}'
+```
+
+The REST API employs token-based authentication, which maps API clients to user accounts and their assigned permissions. The API endpoints are fully documented using OpenAPI, and NetBox even includes a convenient browser-based version of the API for exploration. The open source [pynetbox](https://github.com/netbox-community/pynetbox) and [go-netbox](https://github.com/netbox-community/go-netbox) API client libraries are also available for Python and Go, respectively.
+
+To learn more about this feature, check out the [REST API documentation](../integrations/rest-api.md).
+
+## GraphQL API
+
+NetBox also provides a [GraphQL](https://graphql.org/) API to complement its REST API. GraphQL enables complex queries for arbitrary objects and fields, enabling the client to retrieve only the specific data it needs from NetBox. This is a special-purpose read-only API intended for efficient queries. Like the REST API, the GraphQL API employs token-based authentication.
+
+To learn more about this feature, check out the [GraphQL API documentation](../integrations/graphql-api.md).
+
+## Webhooks
+
+A webhook is a mechanism for conveying to some external system a change that has taken place in NetBox. For example, you may want to notify a monitoring system whenever the status of a device is updated in NetBox. To do this, first create a [webhook](../models/extras/webhook.md) identifying the remote receiver (URL), HTTP method, and any other necessary parameters. Then, define an [event rule](../models/extras/eventrule.md) which is triggered by device changes to transmit the webhook.
+
+When NetBox detects a change to a device, an HTTP request containing the details of the change and who made it be sent to the specified receiver. Webhooks are an excellent mechanism for building event-based automation processes. To learn more about this feature, check out the [webhooks documentation](../integrations/webhooks.md).
+
+## Prometheus Metrics
+
+NetBox includes a special `/metrics` view which exposes metrics for a [Prometheus](https://prometheus.io/) scraper, powered by the open source [django-prometheus](https://github.com/korfuri/django-prometheus) library. To learn more about this feature, check out the [Prometheus metrics documentation](../integrations/prometheus-metrics.md).

docs/features/authentication-permissions.md

@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+# Authentication & Permissions
+
+## Object-Based Permissions
+
+NetBox boasts a very robust permissions system which extends well beyond the model-based permissions of the underlying Django framework. Assigning permissions in NetBox involves several dimensions:
+
+* The type(s) of object to which the permission applies
+* The users and/or groups being granted the permissions
+* The action(s) permitted by the permission (e.g. view, add, change, etc.)
+* Any constraints limiting application of the permission to a particular subset of objects
+
+The implementation of constrains is what enables NetBox administrators to assign per-object permissions: Users can be limited to viewing or interacting with arbitrary subsets of objects based on the objects' attributes. For example, you might restrict a particular user to viewing only those prefixes or IP addresses within a particular VRF. Or you might restrict a group to modifying devices within a particular region.
+
+Permission constraints are declared in JSON format when creating a permission, and operate very similarly to Django ORM queries. For instance, here's a constraint that matches reserved VLANs with a VLAN ID between 100 and 199:
+
+```json
+[
+  {
+    "vid__gte": 100,
+    "vid__lt": 200
+  },
+  {
+    "status": "reserved"
+  }
+]
+```
+
+Check out the [permissions documentation](../administration/permissions.md) for more information about permission constraints.
+
+## LDAP Authentication
+
+NetBox includes a built-in authentication backend for authenticating users against a remote LDAP server. The [installation documentation](../installation/6-ldap.md) provides more detail on this capability.
+
+## Single Sign-On (SSO)
+
+NetBox integrates with the open source [python-social-auth](https://github.com/python-social-auth) library to provide [myriad options](https://python-social-auth.readthedocs.io/en/latest/backends/index.html#supported-backends) for single sign-on (SSO) authentication. These include:
+
+* Cognito
+* GitHub & GitHub Enterprise
+* GitLab
+* Google
+* Hashicorp Vault
+* Keycloak
+* Microsoft Entra ID
+* Microsoft Graph
+* Okta
+* OIDC
+
+...and many others. It's also possible to build your own custom backends as needed using python-social-auth's base OAuth, OpenID, and SAML classes. You can find some examples of configuring SSO in NetBox' [authentication documentation](../administration/authentication/overview.md).

docs/features/background-jobs.md

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+# Background Jobs
+
+NetBox includes the ability to execute certain functions as background tasks. These include:
+
+* [Report](../customization/reports.md) execution
+* [Custom script](../customization/custom-scripts.md) execution
+* Synchronization of [remote data sources](../integrations/synchronized-data.md)
+
+Additionally, NetBox plugins can enqueue their own background tasks. This is accomplished using the [Job model](../models/core/job.md). Background tasks are executed by the `rqworker` process(es).
+
+## Scheduled Jobs
+
+Background jobs can be configured to run immediately, or at a set time in the future. Scheduled jobs can also be configured to repeat at a set interval.

docs/features/change-logging.md

@@ -1,9 +1,13 @@
 # Change Logging
 
-Every time an object in NetBox is created, updated, or deleted, a serialized copy of that object taken both before and after the change is saved to the database, along with meta data including the current time and the user associated with the change. These records form a persistent record of changes both for each individual object as well as NetBox as a whole. The global change log can be viewed by navigating to Other > Change Log.
+Every time an object in NetBox is created, updated, or deleted, a serialized copy of that object taken both before and after the change is saved to the database, along with metadata including the current time and the user associated with the change. These records form a persistent record of changes both for each individual object as well as NetBox as a whole. The global change log can be viewed by navigating to Other > Change Log.
 
 A serialized representation of the instance being modified is included in JSON format. This is similar to how objects are conveyed within the REST API, but does not include any nested representations. For instance, the `tenant` field of a site will record only the tenant's ID, not a representation of the tenant.
 
 When a request is made, a UUID is generated and attached to any change records resulting from that request. For example, editing three objects in bulk will create a separate change record for each  (three in total), and each of those objects will be associated with the same UUID. This makes it easy to identify all the change records resulting from a particular request.
 
 Change records are exposed in the API via the read-only endpoint `/api/extras/object-changes/`. They may also be exported via the web UI in CSV format.
+
+## Correlating Changes by Request
+
+Every request made to NetBox is assigned a random unique ID that can be used to correlate change records. For example, if you change the status of three sites using the UI's bulk edit feature, you will see three new change records (one for each site) all referencing the same request ID. This shows that all three changes were made as part of the same request.

docs/features/circuits.md

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+# Circuits
+
+NetBox is ideal for managing your network's transit and peering providers and circuits. It provides all the flexibility needed to model physical circuits in both data center and enterprise environments, and allows for "connecting" circuits directly to device interfaces via cables.
+
+```mermaid
+flowchart TD
+    ASN --> Provider
+    Provider --> ProviderNetwork & ProviderAccount & Circuit
+    ProviderAccount --> Circuit
+    CircuitType --> Circuit
+
+click ASN "../../models/circuits/asn/"
+click Circuit "../../models/circuits/circuit/"
+click CircuitType "../../models/circuits/circuittype/"
+click Provider "../../models/circuits/provider/"
+click ProviderAccount "../../models/circuits/provideraccount/"
+click ProviderNetwork "../../models/circuits/providernetwork/"
+```
+
+## Providers
+
+A provider is any organization which provides Internet or private connectivity. Typically, these are large carriers, however they might also include regional providers or even internal services. Each provider can be assigned account and contact details, and may have one or more AS numbers assigned to it.
+
+Sometimes you'll need to model provider networks into which you don't have full visibility; these are typically represented on topology diagrams with cloud icons. NetBox facilitates this through its provider network model: A provider network represents a "black box" network to which your circuits can connect. A common example is a provider MPLS network connecting multiple sites.
+
+## Circuits
+
+A circuit is a physical connection between two points, which is installed and maintained by an external provider. For example, an Internet connection delivered as a fiber optic cable would be modeled as a circuit in NetBox.
+
+Each circuit is associated with a provider and assigned a circuit ID, which must be unique to that provider. A circuit is also assigned a user-defined type, operational status, and various other operating characteristics. Provider accounts can also be employed to further categorize circuits belonging to a common provider: These may represent different business units or technologies.
+
+Each circuit may have up to two terminations (A and Z) defined. Each termination can be associated with a particular site or provider network. In the case of the former, a cable can be connected between the circuit termination and a device component to map its physical connectivity.
+
+!!! warning "Physical vs. Virtual Circuits"
+    The circuit model in NetBox represents **physical** connections. Don't confuse these with _virtual_ circuits which may be offered by providers overlaid on physical infrastructure. (For example, a VLAN-tagged subinterface would be a virtual circuit.) A good rule of thumb: If you can't point to it, it's not a physical circuit.

docs/features/configuration-rendering.md

@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+# Configuration Rendering
+
+One of the critical aspects of operating a network is ensuring that every network node is configured correctly. By leveraging configuration templates and [context data](./context-data.md), NetBox can render complete configuration files for each device on your network.
+
+```mermaid
+flowchart TD
+    ConfigContext & ConfigTemplate --> Config{{Rendered configuration}}
+
+click ConfigContext "../../models/extras/configcontext/"
+click ConfigTemplate "../../models/extras/configtemplate/"
+```
+
+## Configuration Templates
+
+Configuration templates are written in the [Jinja2 templating language](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/), and may be automatically populated from remote data sources. Context data is applied to a template during rendering to output a complete configuration file. Below is an example Jinja2 template which renders a simple network switch configuration file.
+
+```jinja2
+{% extends 'base.j2' %}
+
+{% block content %}
+    system {
+        host-name {{ device.name }};
+        domain-name example.com;
+        time-zone UTC;
+        authentication-order [ password radius ];
+        ntp {
+            {% for server in ntp_servers %}
+                server {{ server }};
+            {% endfor %}
+        }
+    }
+    {% for interface in device.interfaces.all() %}
+        {% include 'common/interface.j2' %}
+    {% endfor %}
+{% endblock %}
+```
+
+When rendered for a specific NetBox device, the template's `device` variable will be populated with the device instance, and `ntp_servers` will be pulled from the device's available context data. The resulting output will be a valid configuration segment that can be applied directly to a compatible network device.
+
+### Context Data
+
+The object for which the configuration is being rendered is made available as template context as `device` or `virtualmachine` for devices and virtual machines, respectively. Additionally, NetBox model classes can be accessed by the app or plugin in which they reside. For example:
+
+```
+There are {{ dcim.Site.objects.count() }} sites.
+```
+
+## Rendering Templates
+
+### Device Configurations
+
+NetBox provides a REST API endpoint specifically for rendering the default configuration template for a specific device. This is accomplished by sending a POST request to the device's unique URL, optionally including additional context data.
+
+```no-highlight
+curl -X POST \
+-H "Authorization: Token $TOKEN" \
+-H "Content-Type: application/json" \
+-H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
+http://netbox:8000/api/dcim/devices/123/render-config/ \
+--data '{
+  "extra_data": "abc123"
+}'
+```
+
+This request will trigger resolution of the device's preferred config template in the following order:
+
+* The config template assigned to the individual device
+* The config template assigned to the device's role
+* The config template assigned to the device's platform
+
+If no config template has been assigned to any of these three objects, the request will fail.
+
+The configuration can be rendered as JSON or as plaintext by setting the `Accept:` HTTP header. For example:
+
+* `Accept: application/json`
+* `Accept: text/plain`
+
+### General Purpose Use
+
+NetBox config templates can also be rendered without being tied to any specific device, using a separate general purpose REST API endpoint. Any data included with a POST request to this endpoint will be passed as context data for the template.
+
+```no-highlight
+curl -X POST \
+-H "Authorization: Token $TOKEN" \
+-H "Content-Type: application/json" \
+-H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
+http://netbox:8000/api/extras/config-templates/123/render/ \
+--data '{
+  "foo": "abc",
+  "bar": 123
+}'
+```

docs/features/contacts.md

@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+# Contacts
+
+Much like [tenancy](./tenancy.md), contact assignment enables you to track ownership of resources modeled in NetBox. A contact represents an individual responsible for a resource within the context of its assigned role.
+
+```mermaid
+flowchart TD
+    ContactGroup --> ContactGroup & Contact
+    ContactRole & Contact --> assignment([Assignment])
+    assignment --> Object
+
+click Contact "../../models/tenancy/contact/"
+click ContactGroup "../../models/tenancy/contactgroup/"
+click ContactRole "../../models/tenancy/contactrole/"
+```
+
+## Contact Groups
+
+Contacts can be grouped arbitrarily into a recursive hierarchy, and a contact can be assigned to a group at any level within the hierarchy.
+
+## Contact Roles
+
+A contact role defines the relationship of a contact to an assigned object. For example, you might define roles for administrative, operational, and emergency contacts.
+
+## Contacts
+
+A contact should represent an individual or permanent point of contact. Each contact must define a name, and may optionally include a title, phone number, email address, and related details.
+
+Contacts are reused for assignments, so each unique contact must be created only once and can be assigned to any number of NetBox objects, and there is no limit to the number of assigned contacts an object may have. Most core objects in NetBox can have contacts assigned to them.
+
+The following models support the assignment of contacts:
+
+* circuits.Circuit
+* circuits.Provider
+* circuits.ProviderAccount
+* dcim.Device
+* dcim.Location
+* dcim.Manufacturer
+* dcim.PowerPanel
+* dcim.Rack
+* dcim.Region
+* dcim.Site
+* dcim.SiteGroup
+* tenancy.Tenant
+* virtualization.Cluster
+* virtualization.ClusterGroup
+* virtualization.VirtualMachine